2011 gmc savana owner manual mgmc savana owner manual - 2011 black plate (3,1) introduction iii the...

Black plate (1,1)GMC Savana Owner Manual - 2011

2011 GMC Savana Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-27Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-37Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-59

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10


2011 GMC Savana Owner Manual M

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, and SAVANAare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCwherever it appears in this manual.

If the vehicle has the Duramax®

Diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25953302 B Second Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see the owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . 1-8Sensing System for PassengerAirbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-19Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-20Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑6.

B. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27.

C. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4 (Out of View).

E. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑11.

F. Shift Lever. See Starting theEngine on page 9‑20.

Manual Mode on page 9‑33(If Equipped).

G. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

H. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

I. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

J. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

Dome Lamp Override. SeeDome Lamps on page 6‑6.

K. Cruise Control on page 9‑39(If Equipped) .

Fast Idle System (If Equipped).See the Duramax dieselsupplement for moreinformation.

L. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

M. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑20.

N. Horn on page 5‑4.

O. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

P. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See“Tow/Haul Mode” under TowingEquipment on page 9‑56.

Q. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

R. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑37 (If Equipped).

S. Airbag On-Off Switch onpage 3‑33 (If Equipped) .

T. Front Storage on page 4‑1.

U. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑19(If Equipped).

OnStar® System Button.(If Equipped).

V. Rear Heating System onpage 8‑3 (If Equipped).

W. USB Port. See AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑18.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 feet) awayfrom the vehicle.

RKE Transmitter With RemoteStart Shown

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within 5 seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Pressj to unlock only the cargodoors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold for more than2 seconds to sound the panic alarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash.


In Brief 1-5

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.

Door Locks

Manual Door Locks

Lock and unlock the door from theoutside using the key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if available. From the inside, slidethe manual lever on the door upor down.

See Door Locks on page 2‑6.

Power Door Locks

On vehicles with power door locks,the switches are located on thedoors.

T : Press to lock and unlock thedoors.

See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.

Windows

Manual Windows

Operate the manual windows byturning the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

See Manual Windows on page 2‑16.


1-6 In Brief

Power Windows

If the vehicle has power windows,the controls are located on each ofthe side doors. The driver door alsohas a control to operate the frontpassenger window.

Press or pull up on the switch tolower or raise the window.

Express‐Down

The driver window switch also hasan express-down feature that allowsthe window to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press fully andrelease the window switch markedAUTO to activate the express-downmode. This mode can be cancelledat any time by pulling up on theswitch. To open the window partway, lightly tap the switch until thewindow is at the desired position.

See Power Windows on page 2‑16.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑2.


In Brief 1-7

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:. Adjust the seat by moving the

center knob up, down, right,or left.

. Raise and lower the front or rearof the seat cushion by movingthe right or left lever up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboard sideof the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑3.


1-8 In Brief

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑9.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑12.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑52.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe right front passenger airbag.

United States

Canada and Mexico

To operate the airbag on‐off switch,use the vehicle key.

See Airbag On-Off Switch onpage 3‑33 for important information.


In Brief 1-9

Sensing System forPassenger AirbagThe passenger sensing system,if equipped, will turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. The driver airbagand roof‐rail airbags, if equipped,are not affected by this.

If the vehicle has a passengersensing system, the passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑37 for important information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with outside manualmirrors can be adjusted by movingthe mirror up and down or left toright so you can see a little of theside of the vehicle, and have a clearview of objects behind you.

Vehicles with outside power mirrorshave controls located on the driverside door.


1-10 In Brief

Select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise forthe driver side mirror. Adjust themirror angle by moving the knob inthe desired direction.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Vehicles with towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn it to the original position.

Interior Mirror

Hold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview behind the vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind. Push the tab,located at the base of the mirror,forward for daytime use and pull itfor nighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑15.

Steering WheelAdjustment

For vehicles with a tilt steeringwheel, the lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down into acomfortable position.

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

See Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.


In Brief 1-11

Interior LightingDome Lamp

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. Inthis position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

E DOME OFF : This button islocated above the instrument panelbrightness knob.

Press the button in and the domelamps remain off when a door isopened. Press the button again sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with reading lamps,press the button located next toeach lamp to turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.. Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑7.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

O : Briefly turn the control to thisposition to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.

AUTO: Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,and license plate lamps.


1-12 In Brief

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,and license plate lamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, instrumentpanel lights, and license platelamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Exterior Lamps Off Reminder on

page 6‑2.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑3.. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6‑3.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering column.

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

6 : Use to adjust the delay timebetween wipes. Turn the band up ordown for more frequent wipes orless frequent wipes.

d : Slow wipes.

a : Fast wipes.

9 : Use to turn the wipers off.

L : Push the paddle on top of themultifunction lever to spray washerfluid on the windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4.


In Brief 1-13

Climate ControlsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled with thesesystems.

Vehicles Without Air Conditioning

A. Fan Control

B. Temperature Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control


1-14 In Brief

Vehicles With Air Conditioning

A. Fan Control



D. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1. See Rear Heating Systemon page 8‑3 (If Equipped) or RearClimate Control System on page 8‑4(If Equipped).

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The vehicle may have a RangeSelection Mode. The RangeSelection Mode helps control thevehicle's transmission and vehiclespeed while driving down hill ortowing a trailer by letting you selecta desired range of gears.


In Brief 1-15

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttons,located on the steering columnshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for current drivingconditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selecteda number displays in the DIC next tothe M indicating the current gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑34.

While using Range Selection Mode,Cruise Control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and XM™.

f : Select radio stations.

© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.


1-16 In Brief

4 : Press to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition isoff, press this button to display thetime. Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station or MP3 song.A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, andCAT (category) can display.Continue pressing to highlight thedesired tab, or press the softkeylocated under any one of the tabsand the information about that tabdisplays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment on page 7‑1.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio thevehicle has, radio stations arestored as either favorites or presets.

For vehicles with a FAV button, amaximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAV togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM and FM stations.

If the radio does not have a FAVbutton, up to 18 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedbuttons.

For more information on storing afavorite station, see Operation onpage 7‑3.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theRadio with CD (MP3):

1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

2. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.

3. Increase or decrease the time ordate, depending on the radio, bypressing the © SEEK ¨ arrows,s /\ REV/FWD buttons or byturning f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock on page 5‑7.


In Brief 1-17

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces.XM satellite radio has a wide varietyof programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑9.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput located on the radio faceplateand a USB port located on theinstrument panel. External devicessuch as an iPod®, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD changer, or USBstorage device can be connected tothe auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) input cable or the USB portdepending on the audio system.

See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack"and "Using the USB Port" inAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑18.

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth‐enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.

For more information, see Bluetoothon page 7‑23.


1-18 In Brief

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w orc /x : Press to changefavorite radio stations, select trackson a CD, or to navigate tracks orfolders on an iPod® or USB device.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e or − e : Press to increase ordecrease volume.

c /x : Press to reject anincoming call, or to end a call.

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the front auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track while sourcedto the CD, or to select tracks andfolders on an iPod® or USB device.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

For vehicles with cruise control, thebuttons are located on the left sideof the steering wheel.

J : Turns the system on or off.

+RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed, or press and hold toaccelerate.


In Brief 1-19

SET−: Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or press andhold to decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

For more information, see CruiseControl on page 9‑39.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets located onthe instrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle may have a tractioncontrol system that limits wheel spinand the StabiliTrak system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.Both systems turn on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and StabiliTrak, press and holdd until d illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑36.

. Press and release the buttonagain to turn on both systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.


1-20 In Brief

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑58.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑44. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑42.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.


In Brief 1-21

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782(1‐800‐462-8782)

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new GMC, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6 for more information.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.)or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveAdvisors to provide a wide range ofsafety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.


1-22 In Brief

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar Advisor to verify youraccount information and to answerquestions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are available onall vehicles. For more information,see the OnStar Owner's Guide; visitwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada); contact

OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or push theQ button to speak with an OnStarAdvisor 24 hours a day, 7 daysa week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar GloveBox Kit.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can’t work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, and

technology compatible withOnStar service. Service involvinglocation information about thevehicle can’t work unless GPSsignals are available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle has to have aworking electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and the vehicle is in good workingorder and in compliance with allgovernment regulations. If you try toadd, connect, or modify anyequipment or software in thevehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’tcontrol may prevent service to you,such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of the vehicle,damage to important parts of thevehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.


In Brief 1-23

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar Hands-Free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

On some vehicles, the Talk buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar Advisor cannot beheard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. Push theQbutton and request a vehiclediagnostic check. If the lightappears clear (no light appears),your OnStar subscription hasexpired and all services have beendeactivated. Push theQ button toconfirm that the OnStar equipmentis active.


1-24 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsSide Door (60/40Swing-Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-15

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . 2-17Enhanced TechnologyGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,call the Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.



. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 feet) away from thevehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

RKE Transmitter With RemoteStart Shown

Q (Lock): Press once to lock alldoors. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred.

The horn may chirp when Q ispressed again within five seconds.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for additional information.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door. If K is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remainingdoors unlock.

The interior lamps come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on. If enabledthrough the DIC, the parking lampsflash twice to indicate unlockinghas occurred. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40 foradditional information.

j (Cargo Door): Press to unlockonly the cargo doors.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand then press and hold/ withinfive seconds to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑5 for additionalinformation.



L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/RUN orL is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.

When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up tofour transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. See“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTEKEY” under Key and LockMessages on page 5‑36 foradditional information.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool into

the notch located along theparting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.



3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestart feature. This feature allows youto start the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start thevehicle's heating or air conditioningsystems. See Climate ControlSystems on page 8‑1 for additionalinformation.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions will have an increasedrange of operation. However, therange may be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if you have remote start.

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q on thetransmitter, then immediatelypress and hold/ forfour seconds or until the turnsignal lamps flash.

When the engine starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the engine isrunning. The doors will belocked. The airbag readinesslight will be on during a remotestart. It should turn off when theignition is turned to ON/RUN.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16 for more information.

3. If it is the first remote start sincethe vehicle has been driven,repeat these steps, while theengine is still running, to extendthe engine running time by10 minutes. Remote start can beextended one time.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

After a remote start, the enginewill automatically shut off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done or the key isinserted into the ignition switch andturned to ON/RUN.



The maximum number of remotestarts between ignition cycles withthe key is two.

If the remote start procedure isused again before the first 10 minutetime frame has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10 minute timeframe will start.

After the engine has been remotestarted two times, the ignition switchmust be turned to ON/RUN and thenback to LOCK/OFF using the keybefore the remote start procedurecan be used again.

To manually shut off the engine aftera remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 6‑4.

. Insert the key into the ignitionswitch and turn the switch toON/RUN and then back toLOCK/OFF.

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The hood is open.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. There is an emission control

system malfunction. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑20.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been provided.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock the door from the inside,slide the manual lever on the doordown. To unlock the door, slide themanual lever up.

From the outside, use the key.

If the vehicle is equipped withkeyless entry, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

Power Door LocksOn vehicles with power door locks,the switches are located on thedoors.

T : Press the bottom of the switchto lock all the doors at once. Pressthe top of the switch to unlock allthe doors at once.

When a door is locked, the insidedoor handle will not work.

Cargo Door RelockingIf the cargo door is open when thelock button is pressed on the dooror the RKE transmitter, all doors willlock except the cargo door. Thecargo door will only lock when theyare closed or when the delayedlocking feature functions.



Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door open,the doors will lock five seconds afterthe last door is closed. You will hearthree chimes to signal that thedelayed locking feature is in use.

Pressing thee twice or the Q onthe RKE transmitter twice willoverride the delayed locking featureand immediately lock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmedusing the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “ Delay DoorLock” in Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40 for more information onDIC programming.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a dooris open.

If the power lock switch is pressedwhen either the driver, passenger,or rear door is open, all the doorswill lock and then the driver door willunlock. This feature does notinclude the side cargo door.

If the vehicle has an ambulancepackage, this feature is disabled.

Safety LocksSecurity locks are located on thefront portion of the 60/40 sideswing-out door or the sidesliding door.

60/40 Swing-Out SideDoor—Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

For the 60/40 side swing-out door,move the button to the right for thedriver side door or to the left for thepassenger side door to engage thesecurity feature.



Move the button to the left for thedriver side door or to the right forthe passenger side door to returnthe door locks to normal operation.

Side Sliding Door

For the side sliding door, move thebutton up to engage the securityfeature. Move the button down toreturn the door locks to normaloperation.

Doors

Side Door(60/40 Swing-Out)

To open the front portion of a60/40 door from the outside, pull outon the handle and open the door.

To open the front portion of a60/40 door from the inside, pull thehandle toward you and push thedoor open.



To open the rear portion of a60/40 door from the outside, pull thehandle on the side of the rear doorand pull the door toward you.

To close the 60/40 side doors, closethe rear door first. Then close thefront door. Check to make sure thatboth doors are completely closed.

The swing-out doors have a checkstrap assembly in the door frame tokeep the door from opening beyond90 degrees.

To open the door beyond90 degrees, close the door partially,pull the check strap toward you andthen open the door. When the dooris closed, the check strap willautomatically re-engage.

Sliding Door

To open the sliding side door fromthe outside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle and slide thedoor open.

To close the sliding side door fromthe outside, use the handle to slidethe door toward the front of thevehicle.

When the door is closed, it will beflush with the side of the body.

To open the sliding side door fromthe inside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle. Then, slidethe door toward the rear of thevehicle.



To close the sliding side door fromthe inside, grasp the handle andslide the door toward the front of thevehicle.

Make sure the door is completelyclosed before driving away.

Rear Doors

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To open the rear doors from theoutside, pull the handle toward youto open the passenger side reardoor first.

To open the driver side rear door,pull the latch release at the insideedge of the door.

To close the rear doors, close thedriver side rear door first. Thenclose the passenger side rear door.Check to make sure both doors arecompletely closed.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle is equipped with thePASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System)theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passive theftdeterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it shuts down thevehicle's starter and fuel systems.The starter will not work and fuel willstop being delivered to the engine.Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the highnumber of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity message comes on, thekey may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition offand try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check theinstrument panel PASS KEY fuse.If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See yourdealer or a locksmith who canservice the PASS-Key III+ to have anew key made. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑44.



It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. This procedure is forlearning additional keys only. If allthe currently programmed keys arelost or do not operate, you must seeyour dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key III+ to have keysmade and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key:

1. Verify the new key has 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key into the ignitionlock cylinder and start theengine. If the engine will notstart, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to ON/RUN within10 seconds of removing theprevious key.

The security message will turnoff once the key has beenprogrammed. It may not beapparent that the securitymessage went on due to howquickly the key is programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If you lose or damage aPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual MirrorsAdjust the mirrors by pressing themirror up and down and left andright.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.

On the lower portion of each mirroris an auxiliary convex mirror.A convex mirror's surface is curvedso you can see more from the driverseat. The auxiliary convex mirrorscan be adjusted manually bypressing the mirror.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

Vehicles with towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.

On the lower portion of each mirrorthere is an auxiliary convex mirrorthat can be adjusted manually toprovide an extended field of view.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.



Power Mirrors

Vehicles with outside power mirrorshave controls located on the driverside door.

Select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise forthe driver side mirror. The centerposition is neutral.

Then, adjust the mirror angle bymoving the knob in the desireddirection. The auxiliary convexmirrors can only be adjustedmanually.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Defogger): Press to heatthe mirrors.

An indicator light in the button lightswhen the outside heated mirrors areactivated.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview behind the vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind. Push the tabforward for daytime use and pull itfor nighttime use.

If you have a cargo van without therear door glass, the vehicle may nothave an inside rearview mirror.



Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

Manual WindowsOperate the manual windows byturning the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.



If the vehicle has power windows,the controls are located on each ofthe side doors.

The driver door has a switch for thepassenger window also. The powerwindows will work when the ignitionhas been turned to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑23.

Press the switch to lower thewindow.

Pull up on the front edge of theswitch to raise the window.

Express‐Down

The driver window switch also hasan express-down feature that allowsthe window to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press fully andrelease the window switch markedAUTO to activate the express-downmode. This mode can be cancelledat any time by pulling up on theswitch. To open the window partway, lightly tap the switch until thewindow is at the desired position.

Swing-Out Windows

Side Swing-Out Window

To open the side door swing-outwindow, pull up on the latch at theedge of the window. Swing thewindow out and push down on thelatch to lock the window into place.

To close the window, pull the latchtoward you and push down on thelatch to lock it.



Rear Swing‐Out Windows

The vehicle also has rear swing‐outwindows. The rear swing-outwindows work the same way as theside swing out window, but the latchis located at the bottom edge of thewindow.

Enhanced TechnologyGlassThe vehicle may be equipped withEnhanced Technology Glass (ETG).ETG is part of the overall occupantprotection system on passengervans. ETG may help to keeppassengers sitting next to thesefixed windows from being ejectedthrough the glass in some, but not in

all crashes. Even with this glass,safety belts must still be worn at alltimes. For passenger vans, use onlyETG glass approved for the vehiclefor replacement when damaged.

The following table shows laminatedglass location, based on vehiclemodel and options.



Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations

Eight Seat Passenger Vans Sliding door forward window

Twelve and Fifteen SeatPassenger Vans

Sliding door forward window andrear-most side windows

Long Wheelbase Cargo Vans Rear-most side windows

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down thesun visors. You can also swing themto the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror

The vehicle may have visor vanitymirrors, with or without lamps. Liftthe mirror cover to turn the lampson, if equipped.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-23Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-23Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-27When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-33Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-43Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-49Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-51Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-59

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat-PassengerSensing System) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat-Airbag On/OffSwitch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsOn vehicles with factory installedseats, the front seats have built-inhead restraints that are notadjustable in the outboard seatingpositions.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front edgeof the seat cushion to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.



Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:. Move the center knob to the

right or left to move the seatforward or rearward.

. Move the center knob up ordown to raise or lower the seat.

. Move the right or left lever up ordown to raise or lower the frontor rear of the seat cushion.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboard sideof the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.




To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Rear SeatsRemoving the Rear Seat

Disconnect the mini-latch plates forthe lap‐shoulder belts on the benchseat to be removed.

1. To do this, press the tip of a keyinto the release hole of thesafety belt buckle while pullingup on the safety belt.

2. Locate the pins.

On a three-passenger seat thereare two pins on the inboard sidesof the rear seats.

Three-Passenger Seat Shown

The left side pin has a gray capwith a black “L” marked on it.


The right side pin has ablack cap with a white “R”marked on it.

On a four-passenger seat, eachhalf of the seat has a set of pins.The left side has a setmarked “L,” and the right sidehas a set marked “R”.

If the vehicle has floor mats, thepins are under a flap that hasbeen cut into the mat.



3. Pull the pin handle up todisengage the pin from theretaining clip, and then pull thepin out.

4. Repeat this procedure for theother pins.

5. Pull the seat rearward about5 cm (2 in), and then lift the seatfrom the floor rails.

6. Remove the seat from thevehicle.

7. For the second- and third-rowseats, stow the safety belt latchby attaching the clip on thesafety belt latch to the trim justinside the side door.

For the last row of seats, stowthe safety belt latch plate on theclip at the window trim. Roll themini-latch into the safety beltwebbing and then hook thesafety belt latch plate on the clip.



Reinstalling the Rear Seats

{ WARNING

A seat that is not locked intoplace properly can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock the seatinto place properly wheninstalling it.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

1. Position the seat into the openslots in both rails. Push the seatforward in the rail, hooking bothseat bases onto the pins insideof the rails.

2. Locate the hole in the rail toinstall the locking pins at the rearof the seat base. If the vehiclehas floor mats, pull the flap thathas been cut into the mat.

3. Insert the locking pins into theseat base and push the seat toline up the pins with the base.

On a three-passenger seat,the pin with the black capmarked “R” must be installed onthe right side and the pin withthe gray cap marked “L” on theleft side.

On a four-passenger seat, thepins marked “R” must beinstalled on the half of the seaton the right side. The pinsmarked “L” must be installed onthe half of the seat on theleft side.




4. Push the pin(s) marked “R” downuntil they are in theretaining clip.


5. Push the pin(s) marked “L” downuntil they are in theretaining clip.

6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, putthe flap back to its originalposition.

7. Repeat this procedure for theother seat base.

8. Connect the mini-latch plates forthe lap-shoulder belts byinserting the latch plates into themini-buckles attached at theoutboard positions of the benchseat. Do not twist the belt.

9. Check that all locking pins arelocked into place beforeoperating the vehicle.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inthe vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑16 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash, youdo not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!



Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.



The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.



Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25mi) of home. And thegreatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑44 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑46. Follow thoserules for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.



Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if theshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.




A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if thelap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt is buckled in the wrong placelike this. In a crash, the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not onthe pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.Always buckle the belt into thebuckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured if thebelt goes over an armrest likethis. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.




A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt. If you areusing a rear seating position with adetachable safety belt and thesafety belt is not attached, see“Reinstalling the Rear Seats” underRear Seats on page 3‑5 forinstructions on reconnecting thesafety belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑23.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Safety Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Safety Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a safety belt heightadjuster for the driver and right frontpassenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑12.



To move it down, pull on the centeradjuster control labeled PULL. Youcan move the height adjuster up justby pushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing in to make sure ithas locked into position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) of the vehicle is below3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then the vehiclehas safety belt pretensioners for thefront outboard occupants. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 tolocate the certification label whichcontains the GVWR.

Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tighten thesafety belts during the early stagesof a moderate to severe frontal,near frontal, or rear crash if thethreshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners are activated in acrash, the pretensioners andpossibly other parts of the safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑24.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer.The guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seatsand for some adults. When installedand properly adjusted, the comfortguide positions the shoulder beltaway from the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Locate the guide in a pocket onthe side of the seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into its storage pocket onthe side of the seatback.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑16 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑24.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbag:. A frontal airbag for the driver.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A roof-rail airbag for the driver

(cargo van).. A roof-rail airbag for the right

front passenger position(cargo or passenger vanequipped with a sliding door).

If you have a passenger vanwith a right front passengerroof-rail airbag and a slidingdoor, you will also have aseparate roof-rail airbag for thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passengerand the third row outboardpassenger position.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver,the passenger seated directlybehind the driver, and the thirdrow outboard passenger position(passenger van equipped with asliding or hinged door).

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger, the passengerseated directly behind the rightfront passenger, and thethird row outboard passengerposition (passenger vanequipped with a hinged door).

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑29.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withroof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑44 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑46.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

If the vehicle has one, the right frontpassenger airbag is in theinstrument panel on thepassenger side.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle is a cargo orpassenger van with a sliding doorand it has a roof-rail airbag for thedriver and right front passengerposition, the roof-rail airbags are inthe ceiling above the side window.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbagsfor the driver, right front passenger,passengers behind the driver andright front passenger, and the thirdrow outboard passengers, theroof-rail airbags are in the ceilingabove the side windows. On thedriver side of the vehicle, there isone single roof-rail airbag for eithervehicles with a hinged door or asliding door.

For passenger vans with a slidingdoor, on the passenger side of thevehicle, you will have a separateroof-rail airbag for the passengerseated directly behind the right frontpassenger and the third rowoutboard passenger position.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver or rightfront passenger head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast the vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.



Single Stage vs. Dual StageAirbags

Depending on the weight of thevehicle, you will have either “SingleStage Airbags” or “Dual StageAirbags.” Vehicles that have apassenger sensing system alsohave dual stage airbags. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑19 or Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑37.

If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) of the vehicle is 3 855 kg(8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle mayhave single stage airbags. If theGVWR is below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb)then the vehicle may have dualstage airbags. You can find theGVWR on the certification label onthe rear edge of the driver door. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12for more information.

Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle may or may not haveroof-rail airbags. See Airbag Systemon page 3‑25. Roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes. In addition,these roof-rail airbags are intendedto inflate during a rollover. Roof-railairbags will inflate if the crashseverity is above the system'sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, or rear impacts. All roof-railairbags will deploy when either sideof the vehicle is struck.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For roof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.



What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows for the first,second, and third rows (if equipped).See Where Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑27 for more information.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually. Roof-railairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows,if equipped. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed tohelp reduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑29 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.



What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize anairbag inflated. Roof-rail airbagsmay still be at least partially inflatedfor some time after they deploy.Some components of the airbagmodule may be hot for severalminutes. For location of the airbagmodules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑31.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors(if equipped with power door locks),turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, andturn off the interior lamps and thehazard warning flashers by usingthe controls for those features.



{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash.A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly otherparts. The service manual forthe vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑15 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑15.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe right front passenger airbag.



United States

Canada and Mexico

If the vehicle does not have anairbag on-off switch, it may have apassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑37.

This switch should only be turned tothe off position if the person in theright front passenger position is amember of a passenger risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than1 year old) must ride in the frontseat because:. My vehicle has no rear seat;. My vehicle has a rear seat too

small to accommodate arear-facing infant seat; or

. The infant has a medicalcondition which, according to theinfant's physician, makes itnecessary for the infant to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A childage 1 to 12 must ride in the frontseat because:. My vehicle has no rear seat;. Although children ages 1 to 12

ride in the rear seat(s) wheneverpossible, children ages 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available inthe rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

. The child has a medicalcondition which, according to thechild's physician, makes itnecessary for the child to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.



Medical Condition. A passengerhas a medical condition which,according to his or her physician:. Causes the passenger airbag to

pose a special risk for thepassenger; and

. Makes the potential harm fromthe passenger airbag in a crashgreater than the potential harmfrom turning off the airbag andallowing the passenger, even ifbelted, to hit the dashboard orwindshield in a crash.

{ WARNING

If the right front passenger airbagis turned off for a person who isnot in a risk group identified bythe national government, thatperson will not have the extraprotection of an airbag. In acrash, the airbag will not be ableto inflate and help protect theperson sitting there. Do not turnoff the passenger airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a riskgroup.

United States



Canada and Mexico

To turn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, insert the ignition keyinto the switch, push in, and movethe switch to the off position.

The airbag off light will come on tolet you know the right frontpassenger airbag is off. The airbagoff light will stay on to remind youthat the airbag is off. See AirbagOn-Off Light on page 5‑17. The rightfront passenger airbag will remainoff until you turn it back on again.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the right frontpassenger airbag could inflateeven though the airbag on-offswitch is turned off.

To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

United States

Canada and Mexico



To turn the right front passengerairbag on again, insert the ignitionkey into the switch, push in, andmove the switch to the on position.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is now enabled, andmay inflate. See Airbag On-Off Lighton page 5‑17 for more information.

Passenger SensingSystemIf the instrument panel has one ofthe indicators pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas a passenger sensing systemunless there is an airbag off switchlocated on the instrument panel.If there is an airbag off switch, thevehicle does not have a passengersensing system. See Airbag On-OffSwitch on page 3‑33 for moreinformation.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.

When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or theword OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off, will be visible.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑19.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag androof-rail airbags, if equipped, are notpart of the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.



According to accident statistics,Children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.



. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑19.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.



4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑59 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontSeat-Passenger SensingSystem) on page 3‑62 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontSeat-Airbag On/Off Switch) onpage 3‑65.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle, and check with yourdealer.

If no rear seat is available, donot install a child restraint in thisvehicle.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could be

because that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

This allows the system to detect thatperson and then enable the rightfront passenger frontal airbag.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑42 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. To

purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑12.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, rolloversensor module, or airbag wiringcan affect the operation of theairbag system.

In addition, the vehicle mayhave a passenger sensingsystem for the right frontpassenger position, whichincludes sensors that are part ofthe passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system maynot operate properly if theoriginal seat trim is replacedwith non-GM covers, upholsteryor trim, or with GM covers,upholstery or trim designed for adifferent vehicle. Any object,such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancingpad or device, installed under oron top of the seat fabric, couldalso interfere with the operationof the passenger sensingsystem. This could eitherprevent proper deployment ofthe passenger airbag(s) orprevent the passenger sensingsystem from properly turning offthe passenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑37.

If you have any questionsabout this, you should contactCustomer Assistance before youmodify the vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑67 for additionalimportant information.



Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑31. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbag

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

systems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16 for more information.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑18 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑18.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

child restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑52 formore information. Children can be

endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

If a child restraint is secured in theright front passenger seat, and thereis a switch on the instrument panelto manually turn off the right frontpassenger airbag. See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑33 andSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑59 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontSeat-Passenger Sensing System)on page 3‑62 or Securing Child

Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/OffSwitch) on page 3‑65 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem or airbag switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.



Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint shouldnot be installed in the vehicle, evenif the airbag is off.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with

a top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether strap and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments.The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-Passenger Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

See the information following forinstalling a child restraint with a toptether in the second, third, andfourth row center positions.

Do not install three child restraints inthe same row at the same time andnever install two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

Front Passenger Position

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

The second, third, and fourth rowwith three-passenger seats haveexposed metal lower anchorslocated in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-PassengerSeat—Passenger Van

There are two top tether anchors inthe second‐, third‐, and fourth-rowthree-passenger seats. To install achild restraint in the rear driver-sideseating positions, use anchorpoint (A). To install a child restraintin the rear passenger-side seatingpositions, use anchor point (B).



To install a child restraint in the rearcenter seating positions, use anchorpoint (B). Never install two toptethers using the same top tetheranchor.

If the vehicle is equipped with afour-passenger fourth‐ or fifth-rowseat, it does not have upper orlower anchors. If a child restraint isplaced in the four-passenger fourthor fifth-row seat, it must be securedusing the vehicle safety belts.See “Rear Seat Position” underSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑59 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontSeat-Passenger Sensing System)on page 3‑62 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/OffSwitch) on page 3‑65 for moreinformation.

Front Passenger Position

There is a top tether anchor for thefront passenger position with a frontpassenger seat. The anchor islocated at the rear of the seatcushion on the right frontpassenger seat.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑51 foradditional information.



Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.



Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. For the second, third,and fourth row withthree-passenger seats only,in the rear driver-sideseating positions, useanchor point (A). For therear passenger-side seatingpositions, use anchorpoint (B). For the centerseating positions, useanchor point (B). Neverinstall two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

2.3. Route and tighten the toptether according to yourchild restraint instructionsand the followinginstructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.



If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas an integrated headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas an integrated headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theheadrest or head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑52 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑52 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.



If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑51.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle safety belt through oraround the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑52 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat-PassengerSensing System)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑51.

On vehicles with a passengersensing system, the system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑37 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑19 for more information,including important safetyinformation.


{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑37 for additionalinformation.



If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint shouldnot be installed in the vehicle, evenif the airbag is off.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑52 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑52 fortop tether anchor locations.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑19.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow thechild restraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑52 for more information.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If the child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑37 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Seat-Airbag On/OffSwitch)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑51.

On vehicles with an airbag on/offswitch, you can use this feature toturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag. The switch is locatedon the instrument panel. See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑33 formore information, includingimportant safety information.




{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the airbag switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


{ WARNING





If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑52 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑52 fortop tether anchor locations.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

If you have no other choice butto install a rear-facing childrestraint in this seat, make surethe airbag is off once the childrestraint has been installed.

When the airbag off switchhas turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator in the airbag off lightshould light and stay lit when thevehicle is started. See AirbagOn-Off Light on page 5‑17.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle safety belt through oraround the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckledif necessary.






7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑52 for more information.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

If you turned the airbag off with theswitch, turn on the right frontpassenger airbag when you removethe child restraint from the vehicleunless the person who will be sittingthere is a member of a passengerairbag risk group. See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑33 formore information, includingimportant safety information.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsFront Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

StorageCompartments

Front StorageThis vehicle may have a frontstorage compartment. It is located atthe center of the instrument panelextension, by the floor. To open thecompartment, pull up on the latch.The compartment will openautomatically.

Storage compartments may also beincluded on the inside of eachfront door.


4-2 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-24StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-24Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-25Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-32Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-33Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-34Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-35Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-35Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-37Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-38Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-40


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

For vehicles with a tilt steeringwheel, the lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down into acomfortable position.

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

If available, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑39 formore information on other steeringwheel control.

w orc /x (Next/Previous):Press to select preset or favoriteradio stations, select tracks on aCD, or navigate an iPod® or USBdevice.

Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

CD

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous track.



Selecting Tracks on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew orc /xto scroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw, or press ¨ toplay the highlighted track.

Navigating Folders on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdc /x to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orc /xto scroll up or down the list.. To select a folder, press

and holdw, or press ¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press and holdc /x.

b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar® systems, press and holdfor longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth on page 7‑23 and theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation.

c /x (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio and CD, and forequipped vehicles, the frontauxiliary.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM,FM, or XM™.

For vehicles with a CD Player orUSB port:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

While listening to a CD, press andhold ¨ to quickly move forwardthrough the tracks. Release to stopon the desired track.

+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the volume.



HornPress the horn symbol in the middleof the steering wheel to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control islocated on the multifunction lever onthe left side of the steering wheel.

Turn the band withN on it to selectthe wiper speed.

8 (Mist): Use for a single wipe.Hold the band onz, then release.For several wipes, hold the band onz longer.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Useto adjust the delay time betweenwipes. Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

d (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

a (High Speed): Fast wipes.

9 (Off): Use to turn thewipers off.

When driving during the day and thewipers are activated, the headlamps automatically turn on aftercompleting eight wipe cycles.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced.

Windshield Washer

The windshield wiper paddle islocated on top of the multifunctionlever.

L (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers will clear thewindow and then either stop orreturn to the preset speed.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.



CompassThis vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

Your dealer will set the correct zonefor your location.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

PressT until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press V to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.



4. Press3 until the vehicleheading, for example, N forNorth, is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering with

the compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zone isset to the variance zone in whichthe vehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. PressT until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press V to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE for afew seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return toPRESS V TO CALIBRATECOMPASS.



Clock

AM/FM Radio with Optional CDPlayer

If the vehicle has an AM/FM radiowith an optional CD player, it has aH button for setting the time. Withthese types of radios, the clock canbe set with either the radio turnedon or off.

Set the time by following thesesteps:

1. Press H until the hour beginsflashing on display. Press thisbutton a second time and theminutes begin flashing ondisplay.

Press H a third time and the12HR or 24HR time formatbegins flashing.

2. While either the hour or theminutes are flashing, turn thef knob, located on the upperright side of the radio, clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the time. While the12HR or 24HR time format isflashing, turn the f knobclockwise or counterclockwise toselect the default time settings.

3. Press H again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set thecurrently displayed time;otherwise, the flashing stopsafter five seconds and thecurrent time displayed isautomatically set.

MP3 Radio with a Single CDPlayer

If the vehicle has a radio with asingle CD (MP3) player, the radiohas a H button for setting the timeand date.

To set the time and date, follow theinstructions:

1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

2. Press the softkey located underany one of the tabs that youwant to change. Every time thesoftkey is pressed again, thetime or the date if selected,increases by one.

Another way to increase the timeor date, is to press ¨ SEEK or\ FWD (forward).

3. To decrease, press © SEEK ors REV. You can also turn thef knob, located on the upperright side of the radio, to adjustthe selected setting.



Changing the Time and DateDefault Settings

You can change the time defaultsetting from 12 hours to 24 hours orchange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year.

To change the time or date defaultsettings, follow these instructions:

1. Press H and then the softkeylocated under the forward arrowthat is currently displayed on theradio screen until the time12H (hour) and 24H (hour), andthe date MM/DD (month andday) and DD/MM (day andmonth) are displayed.

2. Press the softkey located underthe desired option.

3. Press H again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CDPlayer

If the vehicle has a radio with asix-disc CD player, the radio has aMENU button instead of H to setthe time and date.

To set the time and date, followthese instructions:

1. Press the MENU button. Oncethe H option displays, press thesoftkey located under that tab.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY(hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

2. Press the softkey located underany one of the tabs to change.Every time the softkey ispressed again, the time or thedate if selected, increasesby one.

Another way to increase the timeor date, is to press ¨ SEEK or\ FWD (forward).

3. To decrease, press © SEEK ors REV, or turn the f knob,located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selectedsetting.

Changing the Time and DateDefault Settings

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hours to 24 hours or changethe date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year.

To change the time or date defaultsettings, follow these instructions:

1. Press the MENU button. Oncethe H option displays, press thesoftkey located under theforward arrow that is currentlydisplayed on the radio screenuntil the 12H (hour) and24H (hour), and the date MM/DD(month and day) and DD/MM(day and month) displays.



2. Press the softkey located underthe desired option.

3. Press the MENU button again toapply the selected default, or letthe screen time out.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets located onthe instrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑59.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterTo use the cigarette lighter, if thevehicle has one, push it in all theway, and let go. When it is ready foruse, it will pop back out by itself.

Do not use the lighter to plug inaccessory devices. Use the poweroutlets provided.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysFor vehicles with an ashtray it islocated in the center console or onthe instrument panel. Pull up on theashtray door to open it if it is in theconsole or pull the door open it if itis on the instrument panel.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it outfrom the console or from the slideout door. To reinstall the ashtray,slide it back to the original position.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English 4‐Speed Version Shown, 6‐Speed and Metric Similar



If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in both kilometers per hour(km/h) and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eithermiles or kilometers.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last setto zero.

Press the3 on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) switch todisplay the trip odometer and theregular odometer information.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑27 for more informationon resetting the trip odometer.

To display the odometer readingwith the ignition off, press the3 on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) switch.

Fuel Gauge

Metric



English

The fuel gauge, when the ignition ison, indicates how much fuel is left inthe vehicle fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge first indicates emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, andthe fuel tank should berefueled soon.

Listed are four situations customersmight experience with the fuelgauge. None of these indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.


Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric



English

The oil pressure gauge shows theengine oil pressure in psi (poundsper square inch) or kPa (kilopascals)when the engine is running.

Oil pressure may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate thenormal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zonemay be caused by a dangerouslylow oil level or other problemcausing low oil pressure. Check theoil as soon as possible.

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric



English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of howhard the vehicle is working. During amajority of the operation, the gaugewil read 100°C (210°F) or less. If thevehicle is pulling a load or going uphills, it is normal for the temperatureto fluctuate and approach the 122°C(250°F) mark. If the gauge reachesthe 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicatesthat the cooling system is workingbeyond its capacity.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24.

Voltmeter Gauge

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is on, this gauge showsthe battery's state of charge inDC volts.

When the engine is running, thegauge shows the condition of thecharging system. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftat an idle for an extended period.This condition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can be only driven for ashort time with the reading in eitherwarning zone. If it must be driven,turn off all unnecessaryaccessories.

Readings in either warning zoneindicate a possible problem in theelectrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.



Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the lightstays on solid until the belt isbuckled. This cycle may continueseveral times if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminderlight, several seconds after theengine is started, a chime soundsfor several seconds to remind thefront passenger to buckle theirsafety belt. The passenger safetybelt light flashes and then stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle continues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The passenger safety belt reminderlight and chime may turn on if anobject is put on the seat such as abriefcase, handbag, grocery bag,laptop, or other electronic device. Toturn off the reminder light and/orchime, remove the object from theseat or buckle the safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stays on itindicates there is an electricalproblem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑25.



The airbag readiness light flashesfor a few seconds when the engineis started. If the light does not comeon then, have it fixed immediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

For vehicles with a remote start, theairbag readiness light will stay onuntil the driver places the ignitionswitch to the ON/RUN position.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, an airbag Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message can alsocome on. See Airbag SystemMessages on page 5‑37 for moreinformation.

Airbag On-Off LightWhen the right front passengerairbag is manually turned off usingthe airbag on-off switch on theinstrument panel, if equipped, theindicator light OFF or the off symbolwill come on and stay on as areminder that the airbag has beenturned off. This light will go off whenthe airbag has been turned on. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch on page 3‑33for more information, includingimportant safety information.



United States

Canada and Mexico

{ WARNING

If the right front passenger airbagis turned off for a person who isnot in a risk group identified bythe national government, thatperson will not have the extraprotection of an airbag. In acrash, the airbag will not be ableto inflate and help protect theperson sitting there.

Do not turn off the passengerairbag unless the person sittingthere is in a risk group identifiedby the national government. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch onpage 3‑33 for more on this,including important safetyinformation.

{ WARNING



If the word ON or the on symbol islit, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag is enabled,and may inflate. See Airbag On-OffSwitch on page 3‑33 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorIf the vehicle has a passengersensing system, the instrumentpanel will have a passenger airbagstatus indicator. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑37 forimportant safety information.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle from a distance, you maynot see the system check. Then,after several more seconds, thestatus indicator will light either ONor OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled, and may inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑32 for more

information. This light could indicatethat there are problems with agenerator drive belt, or that there isan electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.



Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications madeto the engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑46. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Make sure the electrical systemis not wet. The system could bewet if the vehicle was driventhrough a deep puddle of water.The condition is usuallycorrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.



. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑42.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments may have programsto inspect the on-vehicle emissioncontrol equipment. For theinspection, the emission systemtest equipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. This can happen if thebattery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemevaluates critical emissioncontrol systems during normaldriving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.



Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑36 formore information. The light stays onif the parking brake does not fullyrelease. If it stays on after theparking brake is fully released, itmeans the vehicle has a brakeproblem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal might go closer to thefloor. It could take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.

If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑23.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑34.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

For vehicles with the StabiliTrak®

system, this light comes on orflashes.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.

Three chimes sound if the light turnson and one chime if the lightturns off.

If this light remains on steady, thevehicle needs to be taken in forservice.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑38 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑57 formore information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the TPMS. The lightflashes for about a minute and stayson steady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑59 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.



Security Light

This light should could come onbriefly when the vehicle is startedand then it goes out. If it does not,see your dealer for service.

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Immobilizer Operation onpage 2‑12.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑39 for moreinformation.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)This vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located at the bottom of theinstrument panel cluster. The DICbuttons are located on theinstrument panel, next to theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

If the vehicle has these features, theDIC also displays the compassdirection and the outside airtemperature when viewing the trip

and fuel information. The compassdirection appears on the topright corner of the DIC display.The outside air temperatureautomatically appears in the bottomright corner of the DIC display.If there is a problem with the systemthat controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will bereplaced with dashes. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax® dieselsupplement for more information.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel, next to theinstrument panel cluster.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, timer, averagespeed, and digital tachometer.



T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,units, tire pressure readings forvehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), enginehours, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) programming forvehicles with the TPMS and withouta Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, and compass zone andcompass calibration on vehicleswith this feature.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on the vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑40 formore information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

Odometer

Press3 until XX km (mi)displays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has beendriven in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi).

Trip Odometers

Press3 until A or B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) sincethe last reset for each trip odometer.Both trip odometers can be used atthe same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing V whilethe desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold V for at leastfour seconds. The trip odometerwill display the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show 8 km(5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.1 km (5.1 miles),8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc.



If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

Fuel Range

Press3 until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows theapproximate number of remainingkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thevehicle can be driven withoutrefueling. The display will showLOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the fuel economyover recent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change ifdriving conditions change. Forexample, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in the

fuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW message will bedisplayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW”under Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑35 for more information.

Average Economy

Press3 until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.To reset AVG ECONOMY, press andhold V. The display will returnto zero.

Fuel Used

Press3 until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows thenumber of liters (L) or gallons (gal)of fuel used since the last reset ofthis menu item. To reset the fuelused information, press and hold Vwhile FUEL USED is displayed.

Timer

Press3 until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press V whileTIMER is displayed. The display willshow the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was lastreset, not including time the ignitionis off. Time will continue to becounted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press V brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.



To reset the timer to zero, press andhold V while TIMER is displayed.

Average Speed

Press3 until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This display shows theaverage speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. To reset thevalue, press and hold V. Thedisplay will return to zero.

Digital Tachometer

Press3 untilTachometer ##00 RPM displays.This display shows the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (RPM).

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

PressT until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you tochange the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑34. You should change theoil as soon as possible. See EngineOil on page 10‑7. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE yourself after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System on page 10‑11.



Units

PressT until UNITS displays.This display allows you to selectbetween metric or English units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press V to select between METRICor ENGLISH units.

Tire Pressure

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi). PressT until the DIC displays FRONTTIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. PressT again until theDIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you tocheck the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Tire

Pressure on page 5‑38 and TireMessages on page 5‑38 for moreinformation.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Engine Hours

PressT until ENGINE HOURSdisplays. This display shows thetotal number of hours the enginehas run.

Relearn Tire Positions

The vehicle may have this display.To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If the vehiclehas the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), after rotating thetires or after replacing a tire orsensor, the system must re-learn thetire positions. To re-learn the tirepositions, see Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑58. See TireInspection on page 10‑63, Tire

Rotation on page 5‑38 and TireMessages on page 5‑38 for moreinformation.

Change Compass Zone

The vehicle may have this feature.To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see Compass onpage 5‑5.

Calibrate Compass

The vehicle may have this feature.The compass can be manuallycalibrated. To calibrate the compassthrough the DIC, see Compass onpage 5‑5.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V (Set/Reset).

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax® dieselsupplement for more information.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in theinstrument panel cluster. SeeCharging System Light onpage 5‑20. Driving with this problemcould drain the battery. Turn off allunnecessary accessories. Have theelectrical system checked as soonas possible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑23. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possible

and turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Compass Messages

CALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES

This message displays whencalibrating the compass. Drive thevehicle in circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete the calibration.See Compass on page 5‑5 for moreinformation.

CALIBRATION COMPLETE

This message displays when thecompass calibration is complete.See Compass on page 5‑5 for moreinformation.



Door Ajar Messages

CARGO DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the cargo door is openwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN.Turn off the vehicle and check thecargo door. Restart the vehicle andcheck for the message on the DICdisplay.

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is in a drivegear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to seeif the message still appears onthe DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thedriver side rear door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is in a drivegear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, and

close the door again. Check to seeif the message still appears onthe DIC.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger door is notfully closed and the vehicle is in adrive gear. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thepassenger side rear door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is in a drivegear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to seeif the message still appears onthe DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑14. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive the vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.



ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24 for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑14.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24 for more information.

This message displays and a chimesounds if the engine cooling systemreaches unsafe temperatures foroperation. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do soto avoid severe damage. Thismessage clears when the enginehas cooled to a safe operatingtemperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑11 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3 for moreinformation.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL

If the vehicle has an oil level sensor,this message displays if the oil levelin the vehicle is low. Check the oillevel and correct it as necessary.You may need to let the vehicle coolor warm up and cycle the ignition tobe sure this message clears. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7 foradditional information.



OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10‑7.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimesounds when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑24for further information.

This message also displays whenthe engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimesounds if the fuel level is low. Refuelas soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5‑12 and Fuel onpage 9‑42 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if the fuelcap is not tightened properly. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑20. Reinstall the fuel capfully. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑46. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allowsfuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.



Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (3/4 of a mile). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak® andthis message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive,however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messagedisplays, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See your dealer forservice. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑37 for more information.

STABILITRAK NOT READY

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage may display and theStabiliTrak indicator light on theinstrument panel cluster may be onafter first driving the vehicle andexceeding 32 km/h (20 mph) for30 seconds. The StabiliTrak systemis not functional until the light hasturned off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑37 for more information.



STABILITRAK OFF

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when you turn offStabiliTrak, or when the stabilitycontrol has been automaticallydisabled. To limit wheel spin andrealize the full benefits of thestability enhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrakon. However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snowand you want to rock the vehicle toattempt to free it, or if you aredriving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheelspin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9‑11. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑37.

There are several conditions thatcan cause this message to appear.. One condition is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The message also displays if thebrake system warning light is on.See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑23.

. The message could display if thestability system takes longerthan usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. The message displays if anengine or vehicle relatedproblem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service. Seeyour dealer.

The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when the TractionControl System (TCS) is turned off.Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37for more information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16 andAirbag System on page 3‑25 formore information.



Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2‑12 for moreinformation.

WAIT TO START

This message displays briefly whenthe theft-deterrent system hasinitially found incorrect conditionswithin the vehicle and is making adouble check. If your vehicle doesnot start soon after, try to start itagain. If it still does not start, haveyour vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays if the startingof the engine is disabled due to theelectronic throttle control system.Have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

This message only appears whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN, and willnot disappear until the problem isresolved.

This message cannot beacknowledged.

Tire Messages

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE orTIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑25. Thismessage will also indicate which tireneeds to be checked. You canreceive more than one tire pressuremessage at a time. To read theother messages that may have beensent at the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressuremessage appears on the DIC, stopas soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to those



shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 10‑50, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑27.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑25. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑59 formore information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the systemis re-learning the tire positions onthe vehicle. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27 for moreinformation. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection on page 10‑63,Tire Rotation on page 10‑63, TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑59, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57 for more information.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty. Do notdrive the vehicle with overheatedtransmission fluid or while thetransmission temperaturewarning is displayed.

This message displays along with achime if the transmission fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears and the chimestops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.



Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

VehiclePersonalizationThis vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen the vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press U to enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).



Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press U until the PRESS V TODISPLAY IN ENGLISH screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to displayall DIC messages in English.

LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press U until the LANGUAGEscreen appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press U toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

ARABIC: All messages will appearin Arabic.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC. A beep will sound once alanguage has been selected.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the doors willautomatically lock.

Press U until AUTO DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.


To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock.

Press U until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park) .

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

Press U until REMOTE DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press U toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press Q on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress Q on the RKE transmitter, and

the horn will sound when Q ispressed again within five seconds ofthe previous command.





REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press U until REMOTE DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press K onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press Kon the RKE transmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thedoors will be delayed. When lockingthe doors with the power door lockswitch and a door is open, thisfeature will delay locking the doorsuntil five seconds after the last dooris closed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or Qon the RKE transmitter twice. SeeDelayed Locking on page 2‑8 formore information.



Press U until DELAY DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press U until EXIT LIGHTINGappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for10 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for twominutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlamps turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Press U until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressU to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.



ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lamps will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.The lamps will remain on for20 seconds or until Q on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, or the vehicleis no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press U until CHIME VOLUMEappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press U until FACTORY SETTINGSappears on the DIC display. PressV once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press U to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.




EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press U until FEATURE SETTINGS

PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the

DIC display. Press V once to exitthe menu.

If you do not exit, pressing U willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.

. The3 orT DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

O (Off): Briefly turn the control tothis position to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns on theheadlamps automatically at normalbrightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps


6-2 Lighting

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below.. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

If the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. If the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will continue to stayon. To prevent the battery frombeing drained, turn the control to theO position.

A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignitionswitch is off and the headlampsare on.

To change the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam, push the turnsignal/multifunction lever toward theinstrument panel.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the key is out of the ignition.To turn off the chime, turn theheadlamp switch to O or AUTO andthen back on, or close and re‐openthe door. In the auto mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis in LOCK/OFF or may remain onuntil the headlamp delay ends,if enabled in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Exit Lighting”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑40.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/Low‐BeamChanger): Pull the turn signal leverall the way toward you to changethe headlamps from low to highbeam. Then release it.

This instrument panel cluster lightcomes on when the high beamheadlamps are on.


Lighting 6-3

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow‐beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high‐beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of the vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system comes on indaylight when the followingconditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is in

the AUTO position.. The shift lever is not in P (Park).. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel andother lamps will not be on.

The automatic headlamp systemautomatically switches from DRL tothe headlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then releaseit. For vehicles first sold in Canada,the transmission must be in theP (Park) position, before the DRLcan be turned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe headlamp switch is in AUTO,the automatic headlamp systemturns on the headlamps, along withthe taillamps, sidemarker, parkinglamps, roof marker lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampsswitch to the off position and thenrelease. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must bein the P (Park) position, before theautomatic headlamp system can beturned off.


6-4 Lighting

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel. Do not cover the sensor orthe system will come on wheneverthe ignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp systems so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system is only affected

when the light sensor sees achange in lighting lasting longerthan the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately 30 secondsfor the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is lightoutside. During that delay, theinstrument panel cluster may not beas bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button located on top ofthe steering column, to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble. Pressagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.


Lighting 6-5

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

G : An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster flashes in the directionof the turn or lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever allthe way up or down.

To signal a lane change, raiseor lower the lever until the arrowstarts to flash. The turn signalautomatically flashes three timesand if the tow‐haul mode is active itflashes six times. Holding the turnsignal lever for more thanone second causes the turn signalsto flash continually until the lever isreleased.

The lever returns to its startingposition when released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑44.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (3/4 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL ON also appears in theDriver Information Center (DIC). SeeLamp Messages on page 5‑36. Toturn off the chime and message,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe knob for this feature is locatedto the left of the steering column.

D (Instrument Panel Lights):Push the knob to extend and thenturn clockwise or counterclockwiseto brighten or dim the instrumentpanel lights and the radio display.This only works if the headlamps orparking lamps are on.


6-6 Lighting

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. Inthis position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

Dome Lamp Override

The DOME OFFE button islocated above the instrument panelbrightness knob.

The dome lamp override sets thedome lamps to remain off or comeon automatically when a door isopened.

E DOME OFF: Press this buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with reading lamps,press the button located next toeach lamp to turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.


Lighting 6-7

Lighting Features

Entry/Exit LightingThe vehicle has an illuminatedentry/exit feature.

The dome lamps come on if theEbutton is in the out position, when adoor is opened or the key isremoved from the ignition.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle may have ElectricPower Management (EPM) thatestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltage

display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, whenever

needed. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM.If this messages displays, it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑32.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamps if they are left on for morethan 10 minutes when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. This helps to preventthe battery from running down.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Fixed Mast Antenna(Multi-Band) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Fixed MastAntenna (Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Introduction

InfotainmentIf the vehicle came without a radio,the wiring provisions for a radio andan antenna were installed at theassembly plant, so that if you want,a radio can be installed at thedealer.

Determine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.


7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signals relatedto safety belts, parking brake, andother functions of the vehicleoperate through the radio/entertainment system. If thatequipment is replaced oradditional equipment is added tothe vehicle, the chimes may notwork. Make sure that replacementor additional equipment iscompatible with the vehiclebefore installing it. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑23 for moreinformation.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the radio. Thefeature works automatically bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If theradio is moved to a different vehicle,it does not operate and either LOCor LOCKED displays.

When the radio and vehicle areturned off, there may be a blinkingred light to indicate TheftLock isarmed.

With TheftLock activated, the radiodoes not operate if stolen.



Operation

AM-FM Radio



Radio with CD (MP3) Shown; Radio with USB and CD (MP3) and Radiowith CD Similar

The vehicle has one of these radiosas its audio system.

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume.

4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio andAM-FM Radio with CD): Press toswitch the display between the radiostation frequency and the time.While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time. Press todisplay additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDSstation or MP3 song. A choice ofadditional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) can display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired tab,or press the softkey located underany one of the tabs and theinformation about that tab displays.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): Radios with SpeedCompensated Volume (SCV)automatically adjust the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicles speedchanges while driving, so that thevolume level stays consistent.



To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level ofradio volume compensation.The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for moreradio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)(AM-FM Radio and AM-FMRadio with CD)

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

. Press either\ FWD,

ors REV.

EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL, or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) (All ExceptAM-FM Radio and Radiowith CD)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust the bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired tonecontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.



3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey positioned underthe BASS, MID, or TREB tab formore than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL, or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radioand AM-FM Radio with CD)

To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press` or press the f knobuntil the speaker control tabdisplays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

. Press either\ FWD,

ors REV.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) (All ExceptAM-FM Radio and Radiowith CD)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.



3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

Locked or Loc: One of thesemessages will display when theTheftLock® system has locked upthe radio. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The Radio may have a Radio DataSystem (RDS). The RDS feature isavailable for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters displays. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.



Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM and XM. Theselection displays.

f (Tune): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.

© SEEK ¨ : Press the arrows to goto the previous or to the next stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither arrow for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. ForAM-FM Radio and Radio with CD(Base), the station frequencyflashes while the radio is in the scanmode. Press either arrow again tostop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

For AM-FM Radio and Radio withCD (Base), scan presets within thecurrent selected band by pressingand holding either SEEK arrow forfour seconds until a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a storedpreset, plays for a few seconds if astrong signal is present, then goesto the next stored preset. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode.

Setting Preset Stations

If the radio does not have a FAVbutton, up to 18 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedsoftkeys, by performing the followingsteps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1,FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered softkeys forthree seconds until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 foreach softkey.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is parked. Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature. SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑2.



FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle hasa FAV button, a maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeyspositioned below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theradio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press the FAV button to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each page offavorites can contain anycombination of AM and FM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station is tobe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station you wantstored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe setup using the MENU button. Tosetup the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programming yourfavorites for the chosen amountof numbered pages.

Satellite Radio

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM™ stations while theradio is in the XM™ mode.

XM™ is a satellite radio service thatis based in the United States andCanada only.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and XM. Theselection displays.

f (Tune): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.



© SEEK ¨ : Press the arrows to goto the previous or to the next stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither arrow for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. ForAM-FM Radio and Radio with CD(Base), the station frequencyflashes while the radio is in the scanmode. Press either arrow again tostop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

For AM-FM Radio and Radio withCD (Base), scan presets within thecurrent selected band by pressingand holding either SEEK arrow forfour seconds until a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a storedpreset, plays for a few seconds if astrong signal is present, then goesto the next stored preset. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode.

Setting Preset Stations

If the radio does not have a FAVbutton, up to 18 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedsoftkeys, by performing the followingsteps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1,FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered softkeys forthree seconds until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 foreach softkey.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is parked. Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature. SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑2.

FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle hasa FAV button, a maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeyspositioned below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theradio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press the FAV button to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each page offavorites can contain anycombination of AM and FM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.



To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station is tobe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station you wantstored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe setup using the MENU button. Tosetup the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programming yourfavorites for the chosen amountof numbered pages.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM stereo gives the best sound, butFM signals reach only about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 miles). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere withFM signals, causing the sound tofade in and out.



Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the radio. Thisinterference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast Antenna(Multi-Band)The multi-band antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. Theantenna is used for OnStar and theXM Satellite Radio Service Systemif the vehicle has these features.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear reception.Make sure there is sufficientclearance when entering garages orparking structures.

Fixed MastAntenna (Care)The fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base. If themast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Make sure there is sufficientclearance when entering garages orparking structures.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

Audio Players

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD.It could get caught in the CD. If aCD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners is notadvised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.



Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD PlayerMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the

surface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a CD (Single CDPlayer)

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Ejecting a CD (Single CDPlayer)

Z EJECT: Press and release toeject the disc. Remove the CDwhen Remove Disc displays. If thedisc is not removed, after severalseconds the disc is automaticallypulled back into the player.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the left side ofthe radio display. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.



CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press tocycle between CD or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing the discand/or track number will displaywhen a CD is in the player. Pressagain and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary inputdevice; see Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑18 for more information. If aportable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, NOINFO displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe current track if more than10 seconds on the CD have played.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than 10 seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, doone of the following:

For the AM-FM Radio with CD:

1. Press the RDM button until therandom icon displays.

2. Press the RDM button againuntil the random icon disappearsfrom the display.

For the Radio with CD (MP3) andRadio with USB and CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.



MP3‐Supported Files

The Radio with CD (MP3) andRadio with USB and CD (MP3) havethe capability of playing an MP3CD-R or CD-RW disc.

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixedbit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps ora variable bit rate.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. If bothformats are on the disc, the radioreads all MP3 files first, then theuncompressed CD audio files.

CD‐R‐ or CD‐RW‐Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 50 playlists.. Up to 255 files.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl

extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda

file extension.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.



File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than 32characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe file name is not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

CDs that have preprogrammedplaylists reated using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,there is no playlist‐editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playlists can be changed by usingthe softkeys below the Sc andc T tabs, the f knob, the© SEEK button, or the ¨ SEEKbutton. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RWthat has been recorded withoutusing file folders can be played. If aCD-R or CD-RW contains more thanthe maximum of 50 folders,15 playlists, and 512 folders andfiles, the player allows access andnavigates up to the maximum, butall items over the maximum are notaccessible.

Playing an MP3

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist information

displays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, NOINFO displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3's onthe CD currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.



\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below the Sc tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey below thec T tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, doone of the following:

For the Radio with CD (MP3) andRadio with USB and CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey below theh tab to playthe files in order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the desired artistdisplays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3's from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.



CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Radios with an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of thefaceplate can connect to an externalaudio device such as an iPod®,MP3 player, or CD player, for use asanother source for audio listening.This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑2 formore information on driverdistraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the volume of theportable player. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.



CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPod®

using the radio buttons and knobs.See “Playing an MP3” in CD Playeron page 7‑12 for information abouthow to connect and control a USBstorage device or an iPod.

USB Support

The USB connector is located onthe instrument panel and uses theUSB 2.0 standard.

USB‐Supported Devices. USB flash drive. Portable USB hard drive. Fifth generation or later iPod. iPod nano. iPod touch. iPod classic

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying the iPod, goto www.apple.com/support.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod.

USB‐Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders. Up to 8 folders in depth. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes



. Files with an .mp3 or .wma fileextension

. AAC files stored on an iPod

. FAT16

. FAT32

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the center console or onthe instrument panel.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port located in thecenter console or on the instrumentpanel. If the vehicle is on and theUSB connection works, “OK todisconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPod

appears on the radio display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs, anddisplay song information on theradio’s display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.Releases REV to resume playing.The elapsed time of the filedisplays.



\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.

j (Pause): Press the softkey belowj to pause the track. The tabappears raised when pause is beingused. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.



h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.



Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,<, or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): Press thesoftkey below2 to turn shuffleoff. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs): Press the softkey below= or< to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainment andnavigation system.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.



. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth‐capable cell phone with aHands‐Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteedto work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth

system. See www.gm.com/bluetoothfor more information on compatiblephones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

c /x (Phone On Hook): Pressto end a call, reject a call, or cancelan operation.



Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth system andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar Hands‐Free Calling,if equipped. Refer to the OnStarOwner's Guide for more information.

Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN that was provided in Step 3.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle. See “Listing All Pairedand Connected Phones” later inthis section for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands‐Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.



Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.



Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.



. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g, andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g,and then say “Un‐mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready,”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 8-3Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Vehicles Without Air Conditioning

A. Fan Control



9 (Fan Control): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

9 (Off): Turns the system off.

Temperature Control: Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnthe knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to change thecurrent airflow mode.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.


8-2 Climate Controls

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets, with some air directedtoward the windshield.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield and side windows.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Outsideair is directed to the floor anddefroster outlets. Adjust thetemperature knob for warmer orcooler air. The air conditioningcompressor might turn on in thissetting to dehumidify the air.

1 (Defrost): This mode clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield, with some to the flooroutlets and front side windows. Theair conditioning compressor mightturn on in this setting to dehumidifythe air.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Vehicles With Air Conditioning

A. Fan Control



D. Rear Window Defogger

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the timeneeded for the vehicle to cool downand the system operates moreefficiently.

# (Air Conditioning): Cools anddehumidifies the air inside of thevehicle.

V (Maximum Air Conditioning):Cools the air inside the vehiclefaster, by recirculating the inside air.

Rear Window Defogger

For vehicles with a rear windowdefogger, a warming grid is used toremove fog or frost from the rearwindow.



It only works when the ignition is inON/RUN.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turns offseveral minutes after the button ispressed. If turned on again, thedefogger will run for several moreminutes before turning off. Thedefogger can also be turned off byturning off the engine.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Rear Heating SystemFor vehicles with a rear heatingsystem, it lets you adjust theamount of air flowing into the rear ofthe vehicle, from the front-seatingarea. This feature works with themain climate-control system in thevehicle.

AUX: The thumbwheel for thissystem is located in the instrumentpanel switchbank below the audiosystem.

9 (Fan): Turn the thumbwheel upor down to increase or decrease theamount of heated air sent to therear-seating area.

Q (High): This position supplies themost amount of heat to therear-seating area.

c (Medium): This positionsupplies half the amount of heat tothe rear‐seating area.

R (Low): This position supplies theleast amount of heat to therear-seating area.

9 (Off): Turns the rear heatingsystem off.



Rear Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with a rear heating and air-conditioning system, it maintains thetemperature, fan speed and air delivery for the rear-seat passengers only.It also works with the main climate-control system in the vehicle.

Front Climate Control Panel

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

Use this control panel to maintain aseparate temperature setting. Adjustthe direction of the airflow or adjustthe fan speed for the rear seatpassenger(s).



Rear Climate Control Panel

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

If the vehicle has a 343 cm (135 in)wheelbase, a rear control panel forthis system is located in the secondrow behind the driver in the rear ofthe vehicle. The temperature, airdelivery mode, and the fan speedcan be adjusted for the rear seatingarea by a rear seat passenger.

AUX (Auxiliary): Turn the fan knobon the front climate control panel toAUX to let rear seat passengers usethe control panel in the rear seatingarea. This disables the front controlpanel. To return control to the frontpanel, move the fan knob outof AUX.

9 : Turns the system off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed in therear-seating area.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature in therear‐seating area.

The air-conditioning system on themain climate control panel must beturned on to direct cooled air to therear of the vehicle. If it is not on,then the temperature in the rear ofthe vehicle remains at cabintemperature.



Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflow inthe rear seating area.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theupper outlets, with some directed tothe floor outlets.

2 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Be sure to keep the area under thefront seats clear of any objects sothat the air inside of the vehicle cancirculate effectively.

For information on how to use themain climate control system, seeClimate Control Systems onpage 8‑1. For information onventilation, see Air Vents onpage 8‑6.

Air VentsUse the outlets located near thecenter and on the sides of theinstrument panel to change thedirection of airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow or

leaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission (SixSpeed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Automatic Transmission (FourSpeed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-37Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-42Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-43Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-44Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑9.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.



Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's system canmake crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑23.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three‐fourths of a second, avehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). Thatcould be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicle andothers is important.



And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.



Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First applythe brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑3. It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right



front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn the steering wheelto go straight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.



Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑50.

. Turn off cruise control.



Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something couldbe in your lane (stalled car,accident).



. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑35 improves vehiclestability during hard stops on aslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe and/or thefuel operated heater exhaustsystem, if equipped. If thevehicle has a diesel engineand a fuel operated heater,see “Fuel Operated Heater(FOH)” in the diesel enginesupplement.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder the vehicle. This can causedeadly CO (carbon monoxide)gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so youmight not know it is in the vehicle.Clear away snow from around thebase of the vehicle, especiallyany that is blocking the exhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.



To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑71.



Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑88.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver dooropen, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost (striker). The tire andloading information label showsthe number of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑50 and Tire Pressureon page 10‑57.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.



4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle. See TrailerTowing on page 9‑52 forimportant information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips. Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)



Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3

A. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle tire andloading information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle capacity weight.



Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rearedge of the driver door. Thelabel shows the size of thevehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenterline.

Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If there is a heavy load, it shouldbe spread out.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued). When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removableitems, you may need to put alimit on how many people youcarry inside the vehicle. Be sureto weigh the vehicle before youbuy and install the newequipment.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.



. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑52 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brakepedal applied.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑23.

This position locks the ignition andtransmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency, if the vehicle mustbe shut off while driving:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.



2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑36.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

5. If the vehicle must be shut offwhile driving, turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is theposition in which you can operatethings like the radio and thewindshield wipers when the engineis off.

C (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. The switchstays in this position when theengine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.



Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

To place the transmission in theproper gear:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as your engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch to theACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), the Computer‐ControlledCranking System is disabled toprevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. When thishappens, hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.



2. If the engine does not start after5‐10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fast Idle SystemIf the vehicle has this feature it isavailable only with cruise control.The manual fast idle switch isoperated using the cruise controlbuttons located on the left hand sideof the steering wheel.

This system can be used toincrease engine idle speedwhenever the following conditionsare met:. The park brake is set.. The brake pedal is not pressed.. The vehicle must not be moving

and the accelerator must not bepressed.

To control the fast idle:. To enable the Fast Idle System,

press and release the CruiseControl On/Off button andensure that the switch LED is lit.

. Press and release the CruiseControl Set switch. Enginespeed will be held atapproximately 1200 RPM.

When the fast idle is active theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay “FAST IDLE ON.”



One of the following actions will turnoff the fast idle:. Pressing the brake.. Selecting the Cruise Control

Cancel button.. Releasing the Parking Brake.. The transmission shifter is

moved out of P (Park) orN (Neutral).

. Selecting the Cruise Control On/Off button when it waspreviously on.

. Pressing the Cruise Control Setswitch a second time.

. Pressing the accelerator greaterthan a quarter of the down.

. Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

Engine HeaterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

The engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm‐up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at least fourhours before starting. An internalthermostat in the plug-end of thecord may exist which will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The cord for the engine coolantheater is located on the driverside of the engine compartmentand is attached to the hose forthe power steering reservoir.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.



{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine partsand prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows (if equipped)

These features will work when theignition key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,power to the radio and powerwindows will continue to work10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑48.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑36.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pulling the shift lever towardyou and moving it up as far as itwill go.



3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the vehicle into P (Park)properly, the weight of the vehiclemay put too much force on theparking pawl in the transmission.

You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of P (Park). This iscalled torque lock. To prevent torquelock, set the parking brake and thenshift into P (Park) properly beforeyou leave the driver seat. To find outhow, see “Shifting Into Park”previously in this section.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pullthe shift lever out of P (Park).



Shifting out of ParkThe vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply thebrakes before you can shift fromP (Park) when the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. SeeAutomatic Transmission (Six Speed)on page 9‑27 or AutomaticTransmission (Four Speed) onpage 9‑31.

The shift lock control system isdesigned to do the following:. Prevent the ignition key from

being removed unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock control system isalways functional except in the caseof a dead battery or low voltage(less than 9 V) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑84 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever all theway into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, have the vehicle serviced.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑23.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑48.

AutomaticTransmission

Automatic Transmission(Six Speed)Vehicles with a six speed automatictransmission have a shift positionindicator within the instrument panelcluster.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9‑33.



P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily. When parked on a hill,especially when the vehicle has aheavy load, you might notice anincrease in the effort to shift out ofP (Park). See “Torque Lock” underShifting Into Park on page 9‑23 formore information.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑23. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑48.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.



Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load ordriving on steep hills. You mightwant to shift the transmission to alower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑6.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.

In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. Adaptive shift controlscontinually compares key shiftparameters to pre-programmedideal shifts stored in thetransmissions computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when temperaturechanges. During this adaptive shiftcontrol process, shifting might feeldifferent as the transmissiondetermines the best settings.

The shift quality of a new vehiclemay not be ideal because theAdaptive Shift Control process maynot have determined the bestsettings for a particular shift orcondition. Shift quality will improvewith continued driving.



When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

M (Manual Mode): This positionlets drivers select the range of gearsappropriate for current drivingconditions. If the vehicle has thisfeature, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode onpage 9‑33.

3 (Third): This position is also usedfor normal driving. It reduces vehiclespeed more than D (Drive) withoutusing the brakes. You might choose3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is lessshifting between gears and whengoing down a steep hill. See “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode on page 9‑33.

2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed asyou go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to usethe brakes off and on. See “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode on page 9‑33.

If you manually select 2 (Second)in an automatic transmission,the transmission will start insecond gear. You can use thisfeature for reducing the speed of therear wheels when you are trying tostart the vehicle from a stop onslippery road surfaces.

1 (First): This position reducesvehicle speed without using thebrakes. You can use it for major/severe downgrades where thevehicle would otherwise acceleratedue to steepness of grade. Whenyou shift to 1 (First) it provides thelowest gear appropriate to currentroad speed and continues todownshift as the vehicle slows,eventually downshifting to 1 (First)gear. The transmission can be heldin 1 (First) gear using RangeSelection Mode or the shift lever.See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9‑33.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.



Automatic Transmission(Four Speed)

There are several different positionsfor your shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑23. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑48.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must first press thebrake pedal before you can shiftfrom P (Park) with the ignition inON/RUN.

If you cannot shift out of P (Park),ease pressure on the shift lever andpush the shift lever all the way intoP (Park) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then move the shiftlever into another gear. See Shiftingout of Park on page 9‑25.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.



To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑11.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

You will shift down to the nextgear and have more power.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑6.

3 (Third): This position is also usedfor normal driving. However itreduces vehicle speed more thanD (Drive) without using the brakes.You might choose 3 (Third) insteadof D (Drive) when driving on hilly,winding roads, when towing a trailer,so there is less shifting betweengears and when going down asteep hill.

You should use 3 (Third) (or a lowergear as needed) when towing atrailer to minimize heat build-up andextend the life of the transmission.



2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed asyou go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to usethe brakes off and on.

You may use this feature forreducing torque to the rear wheelswhen you are trying to start thevehicle from a stop on slippery roadsurfaces.

1 (First): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than2 (Second) without using the brakes.You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud. If the shiftlever is put in 1 (First) while thevehicle is moving forward, thetransmission will not shift into firstgear until the vehicle is going slowlyenough.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in oneplace on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

The vehicle may have a RangeSelection Mode. The RangeSelection Mode helps control thevehicle's transmission and vehiclespeed while driving down hill ortowing a trailer by letting you selecta desired range of gears.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the +/− buttons, locatedon the steering column shiftlever, to select the desired rangeof gears for current drivingconditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selecteda number displays in the DIC next tothe M indicating the current gear.

This number is the highest gear thatcan be used. However, the vehiclecan automatically shift to lowergears as it adjusts to drivingconditions. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle,but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used untilthe +/− button located on thesteering column lever is used tochange to the gear.



Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑34.

While using Range Selection Mode,Cruise Control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

Low Traction Mode

Low Traction Mode can assist invehicle acceleration when roadconditions are slippery. While thevehicle is at a stop, select thesecond gear range using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels after it detectswheel slip, preventing the tires fromspinning.

Tow/Haul Mode

Vehicles with an automatictransmission have a Tow/HaulMode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjuststhe transmission shift pattern toreduce shift cycling, providingincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and transmission coolingwhen towing or hauling heavy loads.

Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and offby pressing the button, located tothe right of the steering wheel on

the instrument panel. When tow/haul is on, a light on the instrumentpanel cluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5‑24 for more information.

Also see “Tow Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑56 formore information.

Grade Braking (Six SpeedAutomatic Transmission)

The Grade Braking shift modes canbe activated by pressing the TOW/HAUL button on the instrumentpanel. While in Range SelectionMode, Grade Braking is deactivatedallowing the driver to select adesired range of gears.

Grade Braking is only active whilethe Tow/Haul Mode is selected andyou are not in the Range SelectionMode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode onpage 9‑33 for more information onthe Range Selection Mode. GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when driving



on downhill grades by automaticallyshifting to lower gears when thedriver desires to slow the vehicle byapplying the brake. This reduceswear on the braking system andincreases control of the vehicle.

Also see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑52 for more information.

Cruise Grade Braking(Six Speed AutomaticTransmission)

Cruise Grade Braking operates onlywhile Cruise Control is engaged inTow/Haul Mode. Cruise GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when drivingon downhill grades in cruise controlby automatically shifting to lowergears when the cruise set speed isexceeded.

While in the Range Selection Mode,Cruise Grade Braking is notavailable.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑33.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has this feature,engine power is sent to all fourwheels when extra traction isneeded. This is like four-wheeldrive, but there is no separate leveror switch to engage or disengagethe front axle. It is fully automatic,and adjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑24.



If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal, then pushdown the parking brake pedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Pullthe handle, located just above theparking brake pedal, with theparking brake symbol, to release theparking brake.



If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the brake systemwarning light will go off.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑48.

Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle may have a vehiclestability enhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before thevehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).In some cases, it may takeapproximately 3.2 km (2 mi) ofdriving before the system initializes.

Press the StabiliTrak button once toturn off the Traction Control System(TCS). Press and hold theStabiliTrak button located on theinstrument panel for more thanfive seconds to turn off StabiliTrakand TCS.



The StabiliTrak light comes on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is turned off or requiresservice.

When StabiliTrak activates, theTCS/StabiliTrak light flashes on theinstrument panel. This also occurswhen TCS is activated.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® Indicator Light onpage 5‑24.

For your safety, the system can onlybe disabled when the vehicle speedis less than 32 km/h (20 mph). Threechimes will be heard and theStabiliTrak light comes on.

To turn on the StabiliTrak system,press the StabiliTrak button again.StabiliTrak will automatically turnback on when the vehicle speedexceeds 32 km/h (20 mph). Onechime is heard and the StabiliTraklight will turn off.

When the StabiliTrak system hasbeen turned off, system noises maystill be heard as a result of thebrake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. See If the VehicleIs Stuck on page 9‑11.

StabiliTrak System Operation

The StabiliTrak system is normallyon, except when the system isinitializing or has been disabledwith the StabiliTrak button. TheStabiliTrak system will automaticallyactivate to assist the driver inmaintaining vehicle directionalcontrol in most driving conditions.When activated, the StabiliTraksystem may reduce engine power tothe wheels and apply braking toindividual wheels as necessary toassist the driver with vehicledirectional control. If cruise controlis being used when StabiliTrakactivates, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. Thecruise control can be re-engagedwhen road conditions allow. SeeCruise Control on page 9‑39.

The StabiliTrak system may alsoturn off automatically if it determinesthat a problem exists with thesystem. If the problem does notclear itself after restarting thevehicle, see your dealer for service.



Traction Control Operation

TCS is part of the StabiliTraksystem. TCS limits wheel spin byreducing engine power to thewheels and by applying brakes toeach individual wheel asnecessary .

If the brake-traction control systemactivates constantly or if the brakeshave heated up due to high speedbraking, the brake-traction controlwill be automatically disabled. Thesystem will come back on after thebrakes have cooled. This can takeup to two minutes or longerdepending on brake usage.

TCS may activate on dry or roughroads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this a reductionin acceleration may be noticed, or anoise or vibration may be heard.This is normal.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Cruise Control

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

For vehicles with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 40 km/h(25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol is turned off.



If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and thesystem begins to limit wheel spin,cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑37. When road conditionsallow the cruise control to be safelyused again, it can be turnedback on.

I (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator lightis on when cruise control is on andturns off when cruise control is off.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set thespeed and activate cruise control orpress and hold to decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.

1. Press theI button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− button locatedon the steering wheel andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed and staysthere.



Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the +RESbutton. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button on thesteering wheel briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruise controlis disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ on the steeringwheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressI on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory ifI ispressed or if the vehicle isturned off.



FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax Diesel Supplement.

For Vehicles with gasoline engines,please read this.

Gasoline

Use of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑44. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑42.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as spark

knock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasolineshould meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑43 for additionalinformation.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑20. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.



For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines thatare not reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑42.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.



Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations that dohave E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798. Bydefinition, this means that fuellabeled E85 will have an ethanolcontent between 70% and 85%.Filling the fuel tank with fuelmixtures that do not meet ASTMspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

To ensure quick starts in thewintertime, the E85 fuel must beformulated properly for your climateaccording to ASTM specificationD 5798. If you have trouble startingon E85, it could be because theE85 fuel is not properly formulatedfor your climate. If this happens,switching to gasoline or addinggasoline to the fuel tank canimprove starting. For good startingand heater efficiency below 0°C(32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tankshould contain no more than70% ethanol. It is best not toalternate repeatedly betweengasoline and E85. If you do switchfuels, it is recommended that youadd as much fuel as possible — donot add less than 11 L (3 gal) whenrefueling. You should drive thevehicle immediately after refuelingfor at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow thevehicle to adapt to the change inethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑46.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,the fuel cap will be yellow and statethat E85 or gasoline can be used.See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑44.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑91.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This would



allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑20.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it maynot fit properly. This may causethe malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑20.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑88. For information ontowing the vehicle behind another

vehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑88.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many different laws,

including speed limit restrictions,having to do with trailering.Make sure the rig will be legal,not only where you live but alsowhere you will be driving.A good source for thisinformation can be state orprovincial police.

. Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” in TowingEquipment on page 9‑56.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 mi) the newvehicle is driven. The engine,axle or other parts could bedamaged.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 mi) that a trailer is towed,do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

. Vehicles with an automatictransmissions can tow inD (Drive). Shift the transmissionto a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

Three important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The weight on the vehicle's tires.

Also see Tow/Haul later in thissection for information about theTow/Haul button and the Tow/Haulindicator light.



Driving with a Trailer

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

To maximize safety when towinga trailer:

. Have the exhaust systeminspected for leaks and makenecessary repairs beforestarting a trip.

. Never drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Get to knowthe rig before setting out for theopen road. Get acquainted with thefeel of handling and braking with theadded weight of the trailer. Andalways keep in mind that the vehicleyou are driving is now longer andnot as responsive as the vehicle isby itself.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirror adjustments. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thevehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes areworking. This checks the electricalconnection at the same time.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.



Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike soft

shoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason you maythink other drivers are seeing thesignal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, the

brakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑24.



Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift the transmission intoP (Park) yet. Turn the wheelsinto the curb if facing downhill orinto traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:

1.1. Start the engine.

1.2. Shift into a gear.

1.3. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.



Trailer TowingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax® dieselsupplement for more information.

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that of

your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

G1500 Cargo Van 2WD

4.3LV6 3.42 1 950 kg (4,300 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)

5.3LV8 3.423.73

3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

H1500 Cargo Van AWD

5.3LV8 3.42 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

G1500 Passenger Van 2WD

5.3LV8 3.73 2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

H1500 Passenger Van AWD

5.3LV8 3.73 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 266 kg (7,200 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 221 kg (7,100 lbs) 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

6.0LV8 3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

6.0LV8 3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

*The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.



Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑3 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) shouldbe 10 percent to 15 percent of thetotal loaded trailer weight (B), up toa maximum of 181 kg (400 lbs) witha weight carrying hitch. The trailertongue weight (A) should be10 percent to 15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B), up to amaximum of 454 kg (1,000 lbs) witha weight distributing hitch.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitch

ball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.



Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle tires are inflatedto the upper limit for cold tires.These numbers can be found on theCertification label at the rear edge ofthe driver door, or see Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12. Make sure notto go over the GVW limit for thevehicle, or the GAWR, including theweight of the trailer tongue. If usinga weight distributing hitch, makesure not to go over the rear axlelimit before applying the weightdistribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.

Weight‐Distributing Hitchesand Weight Carrying Hitches

A. Body to Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjusted sothe distance (A) remains the sameboth before and after coupling thetrailer to the tow vehicle.

If a step-bumper hitch will be used,the bumper could be damaged insharp turns. Make sure there

is ample room when turning to avoidcontact between the trailer and thebumper.

If the loaded trailer being pulledwill weigh more than 2 270 kg(5,000 lbs), be sure to use aproperly mounted weight-distributinghitch and sway control of the propersize. This equipment is veryimportant for proper vehicle loadingand good handling when driving.Always use a sway control if thetrailer will weigh more than theselimits. Ask a hitch dealer about swaycontrols.

Will any holes need to be made inthe body of the vehicle when atrailer hitch is installed?

If using the wiring provided with thefactory-installed trailering package,no holes need to be made in thebody of the vehicle. However, if anaftermarket hitch is installed, holesmay need to be made in the body.



If holes are made in the body, thenbe sure to seal the holes later whenthe hitch is removed. If the holes arenot sealed, deadly carbon monoxide(CO) from the engine's exhaust canget into the vehicle as well as dirtand water. See “Carbon Monoxide”under Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑26.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 680 kg (1,500 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The optional heavy-duty trailerwiring package includes a wiringharness, with a seven-pin connectorat the rear of the vehicle and afour-wire harness assembly underthe driver side of the instrumentpanel. The four-wire harnessassembly comes without aconnector.

If the vehicle does not have a trailerhitch, the seven-wire harnessassembly with connector is tapedtogether and located in a framepocket at the driver side rear leftcorner of the frame.

If the vehicle has a trailer hitch, theseven-wire harness assembly withconnector is attached to a bracketon the hitch platform. In both cases,the seven-wire harness has aconnector and includes a 30-ampfeed wire.

The seven-wire harness connectorcontains the following trailer circuits:. Light Green: Back-up Lamps

(10A fuse)**. White: Ground. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal. Dark Green: Right Rear Stop

and Turn Signal*. Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed

(30A Fuse). Brown: Trailer Park Lamp

Supply Voltage (15A fuse)**. Yellow: Left Rear Stop and Turn

Signal *



The four-wire harness (withoutconnector) contains the followingcircuits:. Black: Ground. Red/White: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal. Light Blue: CHMSL/Stoplamp

Supply Voltage

* If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse willbe shared for both left/stop trailerturn and right/stop trailer turnsignals. However, the cutawaylighting connector will have a10 amp fuse for each signal.

** If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse willbe shared for trailer park lamps andcutaway rear lighting connector parklamps. Also, a 10 amp fuse will beshared for trailer back-up lamps andcutaway rear lighting connectorback-up lamps.

Tow/Haul Mode

This button is on the instrumentpanel, to the right of the steeringwheel.

Pressing this button turns on and offthe tow/haul mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when thetow/haul mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑34 for moreinformation.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” in TrailerTowing on page 9‑52. Tow/Haul ismost useful under the followingdriving conditions:. When pulling a heavy trailer or a

large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop andgo traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.



Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded mayresult in unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑41 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑42.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid (4-SpeedTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-18Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-24Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-26Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-33Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-35Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-42

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-42Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Floor Console FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-51Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-64


10-2 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Secondary Latch System . . . 10-81Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-83

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-88Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.


Vehicle Care 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealerand ask for GM Accessories, youwill know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑42.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric and Englishfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑12.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑41.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑10.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located in front of thedriver side door frame near thefloor.


Vehicle Care 10-5

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andlift up the secondary hoodrelease, which is locatedunderneath the middle ofthe hood.

3. Lift the hood, release the hoodprop from its retainer and put thehood prop into the slot inthe hood.

If the vehicle has an underhoodlamp, it will automatically come onand stay on until the hood is closed.

Before closing the hood, be sure allof the filler caps are on properly.Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Removethe hood prop from the slot in thehood and return the prop to itsretainer. Let the hood down andclose it firmly.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

4.3 L V6 Engine Shown (4.8 L V8 Engine, 5.3 L V8 Engine and 6.0 L V8 Engine Similar)


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Battery on page 10‑31.

B. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑19.

C. Coolant Recovery Tank. SeeCooling System on page 10‑19.

D. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid (4-SpeedTransmission) on page 10‑12 orAutomatic Transmission Fluid(6-Speed Transmission) onpage 10‑14.

E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑18.

H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑26.

I. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid onpage 10‑29.

J. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑27.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Vehicle Checks section inthe Duramax diesel supplement.

Engine OilFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax DieselSupplement.

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑11.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils with thedexos™ certification mark. Oilsmeeting the requirements of thevehicle should have the dexoscertification mark on the container.This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos specification.

This vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos‐approved engine oil.

Notice: Use only engine oilthat is approved to the dexosspecification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexosspecification will show the dexossymbol on the container. Failureto use the recommended engineoil or equivalent can result inengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you areunsure whether the oil isapproved to the dexosspecification, ask your serviceprovider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos‐approved engine oil isnot available at an oil change or formaintaining proper oil level, youmay use substitute engine oildisplaying the API Starburst symboland of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.Use of oils that do not meet thedexos specification, however, mayresult in reduced performance undercertain circumstances.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C

(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oilshould be used. An oil of thisviscosity grade will provide easiercold starting for the engine atextremely low temperatures. Whenselecting an oil of the appropriateviscosity grade, be sure to alwaysselect an oil that meets therequired specification, dexos. See“Specification” earlier in this sectionfor more information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑34.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).

It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal slowly threetimes within five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Automatic TransmissionFluid (4-SpeedTransmission)If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

A good time to check the automatictransmission fluid level is when theengine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3 and besure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, it may be decided tohave this done at the dealer servicedepartment.

If not taken to the dealer, be sure tofollow all the instructions here or afalse reading on the dipstick couldresult.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transmission fluid levelif you have been driving:. When outside temperatures are

above 32°C (90°F).. At high speed for quite a while.. In heavy traffic — especially in

hot weather.. While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operatingtemperature, which is 82°C to 93°C(180°F to 200°F).

Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 24 km (15 mi) whenoutside temperatures are above10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)until the engine temperature gaugemoves and then remains steady for10 minutes.


Vehicle Care 10-13

A cold fluid check can be madeafter the vehicle has beensitting for eight hours or more withthe engine off, but this is used onlyas a reference. Let the engine run atidle for five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 10°C (50°F) ormore. If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), the engine may have to idlelonger. Should the fluid level be lowduring this cold check, the fluid mustbe checked hot before adding fluid.Checking the fluid hot will give amore accurate reading of the fluidlevel.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle forthree minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine, follow these steps:

The transmission dipstick is locatednear the center of the enginecompartment and will be labeledwith the graphic shown.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for more information.

1. Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull itback out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be in the COLDarea for a cold check or in theHOT or cross-hatched area for ahot check. Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.


10-14 Vehicle Care

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 todetermine what kind of transmissionfluid to use.

Using a funnel, add fluid down thetransmission dipstick tube only afterchecking the transmission fluidwhile it is hot. A cold check is usedonly as a reference. If the fluid levelis low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level up tothe HOT area for a hot check.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Donot overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.. After adding fluid, recheck the

fluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary tocheck the transmission fluid level.The only reason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheating thetransmission. If a small leak issuspected, use the followingprocedures to check the fluid level.However, if there is a large leak,then it may be necessary to havethe vehicle towed to a dealerservice department and have itrepaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3, and besure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.


Vehicle Care 10-15

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can bedifficult, it is recommended to havethis check done at the dealerservice department, which canmonitor the transmissiontemperature. The transmissionfluid level increases withtemperature. To obtain a highlyaccurate fluid level check, thetransmission temperature must bemeasured.

If it is decided to check the fluidlevel, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or a false readingon the dipstick may occur.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission to

overheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes with theengine Off, before checking thetransmission fluid level if the vehiclehas been driven:. In hot weather, when outside

temperatures are above32°C (90°F).

. The vehicle is heavily loaded.

. At high speed for quite a while inhot weather.

. In heavy traffic and hot weather.

. While pulling a trailer.

After driving under these conditions,a hot check can be performed. Thefluid should be Hot, which is 71°C to93°C (160°F to 200°F).

A cold fluid level check can beperformed after the vehicle hasbeen sitting for eight hours or morewith the engine off, but this is usedonly as a reference. Let the enginerun at idle for five minutes if outside

temperatures is between 15°C to32°C (60°F to 90°F). Should thefluid level be low during this coldcheck, the fluid must be checkedWarm or Hot before adding fluid.If the outside temperature is colderthan 15°C (60°F) or hotter than32°C (90°F), a cold check cannot beperformed.

A warm fluid level check can beperformed by driving the vehicleunder lightly loaded conditions andoutside temperatures between 10°Cto 27°C (50°F to 80°F). The vehicleshould be driven for at least 24 km(15 mi) before performing a warmcheck. Checking the fluid Warm orHot will give a more accuratereading of the fluid level than a coldcheck.

Because the vehicle is equippedwith a high-efficiency air-to-oilcooler, the transmission fluidtemperature may not reach therequired Hot fluid level checkingtemperature under normal lightlyloaded driving vehicle conditions.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With foot on the brake pedal,move the shift lever througheach gear range, pausing forabout three seconds in eachrange. When M is reached,move the selector from M1through M3. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle fortwo minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine:

The transmission dipstick is locatednear the center of the enginecompartment and will be labeledwith the graphic shown.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for more informationon location.

1. Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull itback out again.

A. COLD Range

B. WARM Range

C. HOT Range

3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be in theCOLD (A) range for a coldcheck, transmission temperature27°C to 32°C (80°F to 90°F),between the COLD (A) andHOT (C) range for a WARM (B)check, 50°C to 60°C (122°F to140°F) or in the HOT (C)cross-hatched range for a hotcheck, 71°C to 93°C (160°F to200°F). Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.


Vehicle Care 10-17

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 todetermine what kind of transmissionfluid to use.

A. WARM Range

B. HOT Range

Using a funnel, add fluid down thetransmission dipstick tube only afterchecking the transmission fluidwhile it is warm or hot. A cold checkis used only as a reference. If thefluid level is low, add only enough ofthe proper fluid to bring the level upto the middle of the WARM (A) orHOT (B) range depending on theambient temperature and priordriving conditions. Refer to “How toCheck Automatic TransmissionFluid”, earlier in this section forinstructions on driving to achievewarm or hot transmission fluid.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Donot overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.. After adding fluid, recheck the

fluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.


10-18 Vehicle Care

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

The engine air cleaner/filter islocated near the center of theengine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3 for moreinformation. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Unhook the retainer clips andremove the cover.

2. Lift the filter out of the engine aircleaner/filter housing. Careshould be taken to dislodge aslittle dirt as possible.

3. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter housing.

4. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter. Make sure that thefilter fits properly into thehousing.

5. Reinstall the cover and fastenthe retaining clips.


Vehicle Care 10-19

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Van Models” under “CoolingSystem” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Radiator Pressure Cap

B. Coolant Recovery Tank

C. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.


10-20 Vehicle Care

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

mixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitorsand/or additives are used in thevehicle cooling system, thevehicle could be damaged. Useonly the proper mixture of theengine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 for moreinformation.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the COLD FILL mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theCOLD FILL mark. If it is not, therecould be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank for GasolineEngines

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Recovery Tank” under “VanModels” in the Cooling Systemsection of the Duramax dieselsupplement for the proper coolantfill procedure.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.


10-22 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “How to Add Coolant to theRadiator” under “Van Models” in theCooling System section of theDuramax diesel supplement for theproper radiator fill procedure.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the radiator pressurecap and upper radiator hose, isno longer hot. Turn the pressurecap slowly counterclockwiseuntil it first stops. Do not pressdown while turning thepressure cap.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap,but now push down as you turnit. Remove the pressure cap.


Vehicle Care 10-23

3. Fill the radiator with the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture, upto the base of the filler neck.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 formore information about theproper coolant mixture.

4. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe COLD FILL mark.

5. Reinstall the cap back on thecoolant recovery tank, but leavethe radiator pressure cap off.

6. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hose canbe felt getting hot. Watch out forthe engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator filler neckmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of thefiller neck.


10-24 Vehicle Care

8. Replace the pressure cap. Atany time during this procedure ifcoolant begins to flow out of thefiller neck, reinstall thepressure cap.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

The vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on the vehicle'sinstrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑14 for more information.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

See if the engine cooling fan speedincreases when idle speed isdoubled by pushing the acceleratorpedal down. If it does not, thevehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven with nocoolant, the vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-25

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer. See “Driving on

Grades” under Trailer Towing onpage 9‑52.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zone oran overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.


10-26 Vehicle Care

If there is still no sign of steam,push down the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastthree minutes while you are parked.If the warning is still on, turn off theengine until it cools down.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood, get service help right away.

Engine FanThe vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or making

extra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch partially disengages.

This fan noise may be heard whenstarting the engine. It will go awayas the fan clutch partiallydisengages.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid,do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.


Vehicle Care 10-27

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Then remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The level should be at the COLDFILL mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

To prevent contamination of brakefluid, never check or fill the powersteering reservoir with the brakemaster cylinder cover off.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. Alwaysuse the proper fluid. Failure to usethe proper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.


10-28 Vehicle Care

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and/or fueloperated heater parts,if equipped. If the vehicle has adiesel engine and a fuel operatedheater, see “Fuel OperatedHeater (FOH)” in the dieselengine supplement. The fluid willburn if the engine is hot enough.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

You or others could be burned,and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brakehydraulic system. See “CheckingBrake Fluid” in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.


10-30 Vehicle Care

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


Vehicle Care 10-31

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑84 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.


10-32 Vehicle Care

If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, some lubricantwill need to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant and when to change it.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑3.



If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, some lubricantmay need to be added.

When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise the level to10 mm (3/8 in) below the fillplug hole.

When the differential is at operatingtemperature (warm), add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole.


Vehicle Care 10-33

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑3.



If you have the 1500 Series, theproper level is from 15mm (5/8 in) to40 mm (1 5/8 in) below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole. The proper levelfor the 2500 and 3500 Series isfrom 0 to 6 mm (1/4 in) below thebottom of the fill plug hole. Add onlyenough fluid to reach the properlevel.

What to Use


Noise Control SystemThe following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lbs). The MaintenanceSchedule provides information onmaintaining the noise control systemto minimize degradation of the noiseemission control system during thelife of the vehicle. The noise controlsystem warranty is given in thevehicle warranty booklet.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person,other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for thepurpose of noise control, prior toits sale or delivery to the ultimatepurchaser or while it is in use; or

2. The use of the vehicle after suchdevice or element of design hasbeen removed or renderedinoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:. Removal of the noise shields or

any underhood insulation.

Engine:. Removal or rendering engine

speed governor, if the vehiclehas one, inoperative so as toallow engine speed to exceedmanufacturer specifications.

Fan and Drive:. Removal of fan clutch, if the

vehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:. Removal of the air cleaner

silencer.. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:. Removal of the muffler and/or

resonator.. Removal of the exhaust pipes

and exhaust pipe clamps.

Fuel Operated Heater(FOH) — Diesel Engine:. Removal of the muffler.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑3 for more information onwiper blade inspection.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. To remove the typewith a release clip, do the following:

1. Lift the wiper arm until it locksinto a vertical position. 2. Press down on the blade

assembly pivot locking tab. Pulldown on the blade assembly torelease it from the wiperarm hook.

3. The insert has two notches atone end that are locked bybottom claws of the bladeassembly. At the notched end,pull the insert from the bladeassembly.

4. To install the new wiper insert,slide the notched end last, intothe end with two blade claws.Then slide the insert all the waythrough the blade claws at theopposite end.

5. Make sure that the notches arelocked by the bottom claws.Make sure that all other clawsare properly locked on bothsides of the insert slot.

6. Put the blade assembly pivot inthe wiper arm hook. Pull it upuntil the pivot locking tab locksin the hook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper armand blade assembly into thewindshield.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑43.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps

Composite Headlamp

A. High‐Beam Headlamp

B. Low‐Beam Headlamp

To remove the headlamp assemblyfrom the vehicle and access thebulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4 for more information.

2. Remove the two bolts from theheadlamp assembly.

3. Lift the headlamp assembly torelease the lower tabs from theradiator support.

4. Turn the headlamp forward andupward to remove it from thegrille.


Vehicle Care 10-39

5. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

6. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseone quarter turn to remove itfrom the headlamp assembly.

7. Install the new bulb into theheadlamp assembly and connectthe electrical connector.

8. Reverse the steps to reinstall theheadlamp assembly.

To prevent headlamp vibrationand shortened bulb life, be sureto insert the headlamp assemblytabs in the slots at the lowerportion of the housing.

Sealed‐Beam Headlamp

A. Headlamp retainer screws

B. Headlamp retainer

C. Sealed‐beam headlamp bulb

1. Remove the four screws (A)from the headlamp retainer (B).

Pull the retainer (B) out and setit aside.

2. Pull the bulb (C) forward to gainaccess to the electricalconnector.

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (B) and remove theheadlamp bulb (A).

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the headlamp.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps

A. Front Parking and TurnSignal Lamp

B. Front Sidemarker Lamp

To replace the front turn signal,sidemarker, and/or parking lampbulb(s):

1. Use a small tool to unlatch theoutboard clip on the lamp bypushing inboard and prying thelamp assembly forward.

2. Remove the lamp from the grille.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one quarterturn and remove it from the lampassembly.

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket by pulling it straight out.

5. Replace the bulb.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto reinstall it in the lampassembly.

7. Reinstall the lamp assembly intothe grille until the outboard clipsnaps into place.

TaillampsTo replace a taillamp/turn signallamp or back‐up lamp bulb:

1. Remove the two inboard nutsfrom the inside of the taillampassembly.


Vehicle Care 10-41

2. The third nut (C) is under theapplique piece (B) above thelamp. Remove the two inboardapplique nuts. Pull theapplique (B) straight rearwardslightly to clear the studs. Thenrotate the applique (B) just farenough to gain access to theouter push pins (A).

3. Carefully disconnect the pushpins (A) from the appliquebracket

4. Remove the third nut (C) fromthe upper outboard side ofthe lamp.

5. Remove the taillamp assemblyfrom the vehicle.

6. Remove the taillamp/turn signallamp (A) or back‐up lamp (B)bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise one quarterturn and pulling it out of the lampassembly.

7. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

8. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

9. Reinstall the bulb socket byturning it clockwise into the lampassembly.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 toreinstall the taillamp assemblyand applique.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the reardoors at the center of the vehicle.

To replace a bulb:

1. Remove the two screws from theCHMSL assembly.

2. Remove the CHMSL assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one quarterturn to remove it from the lampassembly.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe socket and push the newbulb into the socket.

5. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseone quarter turn to install it in thelamp assembly.

6. Reinstall the CHMSL assemblyand two screws.

Do not block or damage the CHMSLwhen items are loaded on the roofof the vehicle.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

A. Bulb Socket

B. License Plate Bulb Assembly

C. Screws

1. Remove the screws (C) thatsecure the license plate bulbassembly (B).

2. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.


Vehicle Care 10-43

3. Install the new bulb.

4. Reverse steps 1 and 2 toreinstall the license plate bulbassembly.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-up, RearParking, Stoplamp,and TurnSignal Lamp

3157KX

CenterHigh‐Mounted StopLamp (CHMSL)

912LL

Front Parking andTurn Signal Lamp

3157KX

FrontSidemarker Lamp

194LL

LicensePlate Lamp

194LL

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Headlamps

CompositeHigh-BeamHeadlamp

9005LL

CompositeLow-BeamHeadlamp

9006LL

Sealed BeamHeadlamp

H6054

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe fuse block is located in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuse Usage

3 Right Stop/TurnTrailer

4 Spare

5 Spare

6Fuel SystemControl ModuleIgnition

7Body ControlModule 5


9 Body ControlModule 4

10Instrument PanelCluster

11 Trailer Wiring

12 Spare

13 Brake Switch

14 Windshield Washer

16 Horn

Mini Fuse Usage

17 Transmission

18Air ConditioningCompressor

19Engine ControlModule Battery

20 Spare

21Left Stop/TurnTrailer

22 Spare

23 Spare

24 Fuel Pump

25 Auxiliary PowerOutlet


27Special EquipmentOption

28 Airbag

29Steering WheelSensor

Mini Fuse Usage

30Engine ControlModule Ignition/Glow Plug Module

31TransmissionControl ModuleIgnition

32TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

33 Spare

34 Spare

35 Fuel OperatedHeater Module

36Fuel SystemControl ModuleBattery

51Left High‐BeamHeadlamp

52Right High‐BeamHeadlamp


Vehicle Care 10-47

Mini Fuse Usage

53 Left Low‐BeamHeadlamp

54Right Low‐BeamHeadlamp

55 Wiper

56Canister VentSolenoid



61 Spare

62Oxygen Sensor 2(Post), EV Fan(Diesel)

63 Spare

64Mass Air Flow/Canister Vent

65Odd Ignition/Injectors

Mini Fuse Usage

66

DaytimeRunning Lamps 2(LOLVL‐V22)(If Equipped)

67

Daytime RunningLamps 1(UPLVL+V22)(If Equipped)

68Auxiliary StopLamps

69 Spare

70 Spare

71 Fuel Heater


73Lighter/Data LinkConnection

75 V6 Fuel Injectors

76 Spare

77Oxygen Sensor2 (Pre)

Mini Fuse Usage

78 Engine ControlModule Powertrain

79Even Ignition/Injectors

J‐Case Fuse Usage

1 ABS Motor

2 ABS Module

41 Spare

42 Trailer Wiring

43 Fan High

44 Starter Solenoid

45 Engine ControlModule/Powertrain

46 Spare

47 Fan Lo

74 Front Blower


10-48 Vehicle Care

Relay Usage

15 Run/Crank

37 Spare

38 Fuel Pump

39 Crank

40Air ConditioningCompressor

48 Fan High

49 Powertrain

50 Spare

57 Fan Low

60 Fan Control

Floor Console Fuse BlockThe floor console fuse block islocated under the driver seat.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.


Vehicle Care 10-49

Mini‐Fuse Usage

F1 Empty

F2Steering WheelSensor

F3Auxiliary ParkingLamps (Cut‐Away)

F4 Front Park Lamps

F5 Trailer Park Lamps

F6Upfitter ParkLamps

F7Right RearPark Lamp

F8 Left RearPark Lamp

F9Outside Rear ViewMirror Switch

F10Airbag/AutomaticOccupant Sensing

Mini‐Fuse Usage

F11 OnStar®

(If Equipped)

F12 Empty

F13Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioning 2

F14Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioning 1

F15 Empty

F17Outside Rear ViewMirror Heater

F18Rear WindowDefogger

F19 Compass

F20Radio/Chime/XM™Satellite Radio(If Equipped)

Mini‐Fuse Usage

F21Remote FunctionActuator/TirePressure Monitor

F22

Ignition Switch/Discrete LogicIgnitionSensor (PK3)

F23Instrument PanelCluster

F25

Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioningControl

F26Auxiliary/TrailerBackup

F27 Taillamps Backup

F30Upfitter CourtesyLamps

F31 Front Door Lock


10-50 Vehicle Care

Mini‐Fuse Usage

F32 Rear Door Lock

F33 Cargo Door Unlock

F34Passenger DoorUnlock

F35Rear PassengerDoor Unlock

F36 Driver Door Unlock

F37 Empty

F38 Empty

J‐Case Fuse Usage

F16 Upfitter Auxiliary 1

F24 Empty

F28Upfitter Auxiliary 2Reading Lamps

F29 Rear Blower

Relays Usage

K1 Run (High CurrentMicro)

K2Empty (HighCurrent Micro)

K3Park Lamps (HighCurrent Micro)

K4Upfitter Auxiliary 2(High Current Mini)

K5Rear Defogger(High CurrentMicro)

K6

RetainedAccessory Power(RAP) (HighCurrent Micro)

CircuitBreaker

Usage

CB1 Power Seats

CB2 Power Windows

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-51

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


10-52 Vehicle Care

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire was

manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 10‑68.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑57 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


Vehicle Care 10-53

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines. This does not applyto Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD commercialtruck tires.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure on page 10‑57andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

(D) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(G) Single Tire MaximumLoad: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑57 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑57.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-55

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑57andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑65.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards):A tire information system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determinedby tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑68.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one.SeeFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10‑83 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).


10-58 Vehicle Care

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑59 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate the


10-60 Vehicle Care

tires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑27 and TireMessages on page 5‑38.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑57.

The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition but itdoes not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑63, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑63 and Tires onpage 10‑50.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.


Vehicle Care 10-61

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑66.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.


10-62 Vehicle Care

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter's LOCK andUNLOCK buttons at the sametime for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

If the vehicle does not haveRKE, press the DriverInformation Center (DIC) vehicleinformation button until thePRESS V TO RELEARN TIREPOSITIONS message displays.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

If the vehicle does not have RKEor DIC buttons, press the tripodometer reset stem located onthe instrument panel cluster untilthe PRESS V TO RELEARNTIRE POSITIONS messagedisplays. The horn sounds twiceto signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑65 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑70.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑57and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑59.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Dual Tire RotationWhen the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced, check thewheel nut torque after160, 1 600, and 10 000 km(100, 1,000, and 6,000 m) of driving.For proper wheel nut tighteninginformation, see “Removing the FlatTire and Installing the Spare Tire”later in this section, under If a TireGoes Flat on page 10‑71. Also see“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

The outer tire on a dual wheel setupgenerally wears faster than theinner tire. Tires last longer and wearmore evenly if they are rotated. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑63 andTire Rotation on page 10‑63. Alsosee Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑3.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle is operated with atire that is underinflated, the tirecan overheat. An overheated tirecan lose air suddenly or catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Properly inflate all tires,including the spare.

See Tires on page 10‑50 and TirePressure on page 10‑57 for moreinformation on proper tire inflation.


Vehicle Care 10-65

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining.

Some commercial truck tires,including Goodyear LT225/75R16G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD, may not havetreadwear indicators. If the tires donot have treadwear indicators,replace the tires when the treaddepth is down to 3.2 mm (1/8 in) forthe front tires, or 1.6 mm (1/16 in) forthe rear tires. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑63 and Tire Rotation onpage 10‑63 for additionalinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typicallyneed to be replaced due to wearbefore they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. When replacement tires areneeded, GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM's TPCSpec number is molded onto thetire's sidewall near the tire size.If the tires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec number willbe followed by MS for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 10‑51 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing all thetires at the same time. Uniform treaddepth on all tires will help tomaintain the performance of thevehicle. Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. See TireInspection on page 10‑63 and TireRotation on page 10‑63 forinformation on proper tire rotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may cause lossof control of the vehicle, resultingin a crash or other vehicledamage. Use the correct size,brand, and type of tires on allwheels.

This vehicle may have a differentsize spare than the road tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle.When new, the vehicle included aspare tire and wheel assemblywith a similar overall diameter asthe road tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. The sparetire was developed for use on thisvehicle and will not affect vehiclehandling.


Vehicle Care 10-67

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must be replacedwith a tire that does not have a TPCSpec number, make sure they arethe same size, load range, speedrating, and construction (radial) asthe original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low‐pressure warning ifnon‐TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑58.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel indicates the originalequipment tires on the vehicle. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12for the label location and moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑66 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporary

use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 10-69

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a levelof performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑71 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage tothe brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damagedby the tire chains could cause youto lose control of the vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash. To help avoid damage tothe vehicle, drive slowly, readjust,or remove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle. Do notspin the vehicle's tires. Follow themanufacturer's instructions.

Notice: Use tire chains onlywhere legal and only when youmust. Use chains that are theproper size for the tires. Installthem on the tires of the rear axle.Do not use chains on the tires ofthe front axle. Tighten them astightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chainmanufacturer's instructions.If you can hear the chainscontacting the vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until itstops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage the vehicle.

For Cutaway models with LT245/75R16, LT225/75R16 or LT215/85R16 size single or dual rear tires,use Low Profile Z-Chain or SAEClass S cables.

For Cargo or Passenger modelswith P245/70R17, LT225/75R16 orLT245/75R16 size tires, use LowProfile Z-Chain cables. SAE Class Schains are not recommended.

If the vehicle has dual rear tires, donot use individual tire chains. Usetire chains that fit across both dualtires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.


10-72 Vehicle Care

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.


Vehicle Care 10-73

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

If you have a cargo van or apassenger van, the equipment youwill need is located in the passengerside rear corner of the vehicle.

Remove the retaining wing bolt andlift it off of the mounting bracket.

If you have a van with the15‐passenger seating arrangement,the equipment you will need issecured on the rear floor of thepassenger side of the vehicle.

To access the equipment, removethe retaining wing bolt and lift it outof the mounting bracket.


10-74 Vehicle Care

The tools you will be using include:

A. Jack

B. Jack Handle

C. Hoist Extension

D. Jack Handle Extension

E. Wheel Wrench

The spare tire is mounted in the rearunderbody of the vehicle.

You will use the hoist extension, thejack handle extensions and thewheel wrench to remove theunderbody‐mounted spare tire.

To lower the spare tire from thevehicle:

A. Spare Tire

B. Tire/Wheel Retainer

C. Hoist Cable

D. Hoist Assembly

E. Hoist Shaft

F. Jack Handle and HoistExtensions

G. Wheel Wrench

1. Assemble the wheel wrench (G)to one or two of the jack handleand the hoist extensions (F).

Insert the hoist extension endthrough the hole in the rearbumper.

2. Be sure the hoist extension endconnects to the hoist shaft (E).The chiseled end of theextension is used to lower thespare tire.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-75

If the spare tire does not lower tothe ground, the secondary latchis engaged causing the tire notto lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 10‑81.

4. When the tire has beenlowered, pull the tire toward youso you can reach the tireretainer and pull it up throughthe wheel opening.

If you have a vehicle which wascompleted from a cab andchassis, refer to the informationfrom body supplier/installer.

The spare tire is a full‐size tire,like the other tires on thevehicle.

5. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

If the vehicle has plastic wheel nutcaps, loosen them by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwise.The wheel nut caps are designed toremain with the center cap. Removethe center cap.

If the wheel has a smooth centerpiece, place the chisel end of thewheel wrench in the slot on thewheel and gently pry it out.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑71 for moreinformation.

2. Loosen all the wheel nuts withthe wheel wrench. Do notremove them yet.

3. Assemble the jack and tools:

Front Flat: Assemble thejack (A) together with the jackhandle (B), one or two jackhandle extensions (D) and thewheel wrench (E).

Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A)together with the jack handle (B),two jack handle extensions (D),and the wheel wrench (E).


10-76 Vehicle Care

Front Position

Front Position

Rear Position

Rear Alternative Position (DieselVehicles)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle as shown.

The front position jacking point ison the frame. The rear positionjacking point is on the rear axle.

If the exhaust system interferesin the jack location in the rearaxle, such as in Diesel vehicles,place the jack (A) on therear axle between the axlehousing and the shock absorberbracket in order to avoid anyinterference with the exhaustpipe (B).

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.


Vehicle Care 10-77

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning thewheel wrench clockwise. Raisethe vehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the spare tire to fit.

6. Remove all the wheel nuts.

7. Take flat tire off of the mountingsurface.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.


10-78 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel. Tighten eachwheel nut by hand until thewheel is held against the hub.

10. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are not tight canwork loose. If all the nuts on awheel come off, the wheel cancome off the vehicle, causing acrash. All wheel nuts must beproperly tightened. Follow therules in this section to be surethey are.

{ WARNING

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel couldcome off and cause a crash.If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs aredamaged. To be sure, replace allstuds on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspecthubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of looserunning wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.


Vehicle Care 10-79

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

11. Use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts firmly. Turn thewheel wrench clockwise and ina crisscross sequence asshown.

12. Put the wheel cover or thecenter cap and plastic wheelnut caps back on. Remove anywheel blocks.

Have a technician check thewheel nut tightness of allwheels with a torque wrenchafter the first 160 km(100 miles) and then 1600 km(1,000 miles) after that. Repeatthis service whenever you havea tire removed or serviced. SeeCapacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for moreinformation.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle with the valvestem pointed down.

2. Pull the retaining bar through thecenter of the wheel, making sureit is properly attached.

3. Pull the wheel toward the rear ofthe vehicle, keeping the cabletight.

4. Put the chisel end of the hoistextension on an angle throughthe hole in the rear door frame,above the bumper.

5. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle.Continue turning the wheelwrench until the tire is secure

and the cable is tight. The sparetire hoist cannot beovertightened.

6. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrench totighten the cable.

You will hear two clicks when thetire is up all the way.

7. Return the jacking equipment tothe proper location. Secure theitems and replace the jack cover.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has anunderbody-mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with asecondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the spare tire fromsuddenly falling off the vehicle if thecable holding the spare tire isdamaged. For the secondary latchto work, the tire must be stowedwith the valve stem pointing down.

See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑73 for instructions onstoring the spare tire correctly.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

1. Check under the vehicle to see ifthe cable end is visible.

If the cable is not visible, startthis procedure at Step 6.

2. Turn the hoist extensioncounterclockwise untilapproximately 15 cm (6 in) ofcable is exposed.


10-82 Vehicle Care

3. Attach the jack handle/jackhandle extension and wheelwrench to the jack.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle,ahead of the rear bumper.Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of thespare tire and turn the handleclockwise to raise the jack until itlifts the secondary latch spring.

5. Keep raising the jack until thespare tire stops moving upwardand is held firmly in place. Thislets you know that the secondarylatch has released. The sparetire is now balancing on the jack.

6. Lower the jack by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwise.Keep lowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jack or ishanging by the cable.

7. Disconnect the jack handle fromthe jack and carefully removethe jack. Use one hand to pushagainst the spare while firmlypulling the jack out from underthe spare tire with theother hand.

If the spare tire is hanging fromthe cable, assembly the wheelwrench onto the hoist extensionand insert the chisel end of thehoist extension into the hoistshaft hole above the bumper.Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare the rest of the way.

8. Tilt the retainer at the end of thecable and pull it through thewheel opening. Pull the tire outfrom under the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Notice: If you drive away beforethe spare tire or secondarylatch system cable has beenreinstalled, you could damage thevehicle. Always reinstall thiscable before driving the vehicle.

9. If the cable is hanging underthe vehicle, turn the wheelwrench in the hoist shaft hole inthe bumper clockwise to raisethe cable back up.

Have the hoist assembly inspectedas soon as you can. You will not beable to store a spare or flat tireusing the hoist assembly until it hasbeen repaired or replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire,return to Step 4 of “Storing a Flat orSpare Tire and Tools” under TireChanging on page 10‑73.

Full-Size Spare TireThis vehicle, when new, may havehad a fully-inflated spare tire.A spare tire may lose air over time,so check its inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12 for informationregarding proper tire inflation andloading the vehicle. For instructionon how to remove, install or store aspare tire, see “Removing the FlatTire and Installing the Spare Tire”and “Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑73.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, you should stop as soon aspossible and make sure the spare iscorrectly inflated. The spare tire ismade to perform well at speedsup to 112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced as soon as youcan and installed back onto thevehicle. This way, a spare tire willbe available in case you need itagain. Do not mix tires and wheelsof different sizes, because they willnot fit. Keep the spare tire and itswheel together.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑31.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start your

vehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission inN (Neutral) before setting theparking brake.

Notice: If the radio or otheraccessories are left on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-85

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations of the othervehicle.

On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go toan unpainted metal part or to aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. On yourvan, use the unpainted radioantenna bracket as a remotenegative (−) terminal.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.


10-86 Vehicle Care

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Do not let theother end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal ofthe good battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. On your van, use theunpainted radio antenna bracketas a remote negative (−)terminal.

8. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal location on

the vehicle with the dead battery.On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

Notice: Your vehicle uses theunpainted radio antenna bracketas a remote negative (−) terminal.Move the antenna coax cable outof the way before clamping thenegative jumper cable to the fixedantenna bracket. Avoid touchingthe negative cable clamp to theair conditioning line. Failure to doeither of these could damageyour vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

9. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run the enginefor a while.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Unpainted Metal Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+)terminal cover to its originalposition.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motorhome, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle? Besure to read the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles shouldnot be towed with all four wheels onthe ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff the ground.

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drivevehicle with all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow an all-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.

Dolly Towing

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround) – Two‐Wheel‐DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to towthe vehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.


10-90 Vehicle Care

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 9‑36for more information.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

If the tow vehicle will not bestarted or driven for six weeks ormore, remove the battery cablefrom the negative terminal (post)of the battery to prevent thebattery from draining whiletowing.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround) – All‐Wheel‐DriveVehicles

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff the ground.

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drivevehicle with all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow an all-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.


Vehicle Care 10-91

Appearance Care

Exterior CareIf dirt and/or contaminants build upin the glass seals, use a cloth andwater to clean the glass seals.Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑7.

Washing the Vehicle

The best way to preserve the finishis to keep it clean by washing itoften.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washing soap.Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturers'directions regarding correct productusage, necessary safety

precautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8 274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.


10-92 Vehicle Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle.”

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To helpkeep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Washing with water is all thatis usually needed. However, chromepolish may be used on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.


Vehicle Care 10-93

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap and abuildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions.. Sand and salt.. Heat and sun.. Snow and ice, without proper

removal.

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because they coulddamage the surface. Do not usechrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before being

flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 months or20 000 km (12,000 mi) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

Interior CareThe interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Althoughnot always visible, dust and dirt canaccumulate on the upholstery. Dirtcan damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regularvacuuming is recommended toremove particles from theupholstery. It is important to keepthe upholstery from becoming andremaining heavily soiled. Soilsshould be removed as quickly aspossible. The interior mayexperience extremes of heat thatcould cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning. Use carebecause newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to homefurnishings may also transfer colorto the interior.

When cleaning the interior, only usecleaners specifically designed forthe surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for

which they were not intended. Useglass cleaner only on glass.Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. Toprevent over-spray, apply cleanerdirectly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents thatmay become concentrated in thebreathing space. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the interior, maintainadequate ventilation by opening thedoors and windows.

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.


10-96 Vehicle Care

Products that remove odors fromthe upholstery and clean the glasscan be obtained from your dealer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:. A knife or any other sharp object

to remove a soil from any interiorsurface.

. A stiff brush. It can causedamage to the interior surfaces.

. Heavy pressure or aggressiverubbing with a cleaning cloth.Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residuethat streaks and attracts dirt. Forliquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of water is agood guide. Use only mild,neutral-pH soaps.

. Too much cleaner that saturatesthe upholstery.

. Cleaners that contain solventscan damage the interior.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment frequently toremove dust and loose dirt.A canister vacuum with a beater barin the nozzle may only be used onfloor carpet and carpeted floor mats.For any soil, always try to remove itfirst with plain water or club soda.Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible usingone of the following techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to removeexcess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plainwater.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner orspot lifter is to be used, test a smallhidden area for colorfastness first.


Vehicle Care 10-97

If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation mayresult, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisture fromthe fabric or carpet.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl andother Plastic Surfaces

A soft cloth dampened with watermay be used to remove dust. If amore thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatingsthat are sold to preserve andprotect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the interior because they

can alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Notice: Air fresheners containsolvents that may cause damageto plastics and painted surfaces.Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when using airfresheners in the vehicle. If airfreshener comes in contact withpaint or a plastic surface, blotimmediately with a soft cloth.Damage caused by using airfresheners would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


10-98 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-3

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10

General InformationThis maintenance section applies tovehicles with a gasoline engine. Fordiesel engine vehicles, see themaintenance schedule section inthe Duramax Diesel Supplement.

Notice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps to keepthe vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑42.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can be certainthat you will receive the highestlevel of service available. Yourdealer has specially trained servicetechnicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipment toensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 mi. See TireRotation on page 10‑63.



ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7. AnEmission Control Service.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, service isrequired for the vehicle as soon aspossible, within the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmight not indicate the need forvehicle service for more than a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.

Your dealer has trained servicetechnicians who will perform thiswork and reset the system. If theengine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

Reset oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7 andEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11. An Emission ControlService.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑20.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspection ofhoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑27.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑91. Worn ordamaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑37.

. Tire inflation pressures check.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑63.

. Rotate tires if necessary. SeeTire Rotation on page 10‑63.

. Fluids visual leak check (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired and thefluid level checked.



. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑18.

. Brake system inspection (orevery 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Lubricate the front suspension,kingpin bushings, steeringlinkage, and rear driveline centersplines.

. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, folding seathardware, and rear compartmenthinges, linkage, and handle pivotpoints lubrication. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7. Morefrequent lubrication may berequired when the vehicle isexposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with a

clean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑23.

. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

. Vehicles with diesel engine orGVWR above 4 536 kg(10,000 lbs) only: Shieldsinspection for damage orlooseness. Adjust or replace asrequired. This is a NoiseEmission Control Service.Applicable to vehicles sold in theUnited States and recommendedfor vehicles sold in Canada.

Additional Required Services

At the First 160 km/100 Miles,1 600 km/1,000 Miles, and10 000 km/6,000 Miles. For vehicles with dual wheels:

Check dual wheel nut torque.For proper torque, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should be

rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. See Tire Rotation onpage 10‑63.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑7.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑20.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑27.



Once a Month. Tire inflation pressures check.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑57.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑63.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑35.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑35.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑36.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑36.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Underbody flushing service.

. Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/LiftglassSupport Gas Strut Service:Visually inspect gas strut,if equipped, for signs of wear,cracks, or other damage. Checkthe hold open ability of the gasstrut. Contact your dealer ifservice is required.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑18.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, in hillyor mountainous terrain, whenfrequently towing a trailer,or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid(4-Speed Transmission) onpage 10‑12 or AutomaticTransmission Fluid (6-SpeedTransmission) on page 10‑14.

. All‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (severeservice) for vehicles mainlydriven when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. Check venthose at transfer case forkinks and proper installation.Check to be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris. During any maintenance,if a power washer is used toclean mud and dirt from theunderbody, care should be takento not directly spray the transfercase output seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.



. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed. AnEmission Control Service. TheU.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency or the California AirResources Board hasdetermined that the failure toperform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of thevehicle's useful life. We,however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid(4-Speed Transmission) onpage 10‑12 or AutomaticTransmission Fluid (6-SpeedTransmission) on page 10‑14.

. All‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (normalservice). Check vent hose attransfer case for kinks andproper installation. Check to besure vent hose is unobstructed,clear, and free of debris. Duringany maintenance, if a powerwasher is used to clean mudand dirt from the underbody,care should be taken to notdirectly spray the transfer caseoutput seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection. AnEmission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or every fiveyears, whichever occurs first).See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑20. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine drive belts inspection forfraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage (or every10 years, whichever occursfirst). Replace, if needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see themaintenance schedule section in the Duramax Diesel Supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oilsmeeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexoscertification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑20.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking Brake Cable GuidesChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Wheel BearingsWheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category GC orGC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344, in Canada 993037).

Front and Rear AxleSAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer Case DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

One-Piece Propshaft Slip YokeSpline, Two-Piece Propshaft

Slip-in-Tube Spline

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879, inCanada 10953511).

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Weatherstrip SqueaksSynthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsIf the vehicle has the Duramax® diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15950115 A3097C

Engine Oil Filter

4.3L V6 25010792 PF47

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

4.3L V6 12568387 41-101

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades – 56.0 cm (22 in) 25949887 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont.)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the rear edge of thepassenger side front door, has thefollowing information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsIf the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System without Rear Heat

4.3L V6 9.5 L 10.0 qt

4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 11.8 L 12.4 qt

6.0L V8 13.1 L 13.8 qt

Cooling System with Rear Heat

4.3L V6 12.3 L 13.0 qt

4.8L V8, 5.3L V8 14.6 L 15.4 qt

6.0L V8 16.1 L 17.0 qt


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Engine Oil with Filter

4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt

4.8L V8, 5.3L V8, 6.0L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Cutaway (Optional Tank)* 215.7 L 57.0 gal

Cutaway (Standard Tank) 124.9 L 33.0 gal

Passenger and Cargo 117.3 L 31.0 gal

* 4 039 mm (159 inch) wheelbase or 4 496 mm (177 inch) wheelbase only

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)

4-SPD 4L60-E 4.7 L 5.0 qt

6-SPD 6L90 6.0 L 6.3 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 ft lb

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

4.3L V6 X Automatic 1.52 mm (0.060 in)

4.8L V8 A Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

5.3L V8 4 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

6.0L V8 G Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

V6 Engines

V8 Engines



Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782, CustomerAssistance prompt. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Communication at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available from thevehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofilling out a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-462-8782

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

Front U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0801Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with GMC by dialing:1-800-462-8583. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

GMC Owner Center (U.S.)www.gmcownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. GMC dealer locator for service

nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.



Other Helpful Links

GMC — www.gmc.com

GMC Merchandise —www.gmccollection.com

Help Center — www.gmc.com/helpcenter. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values,or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.



General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐462‐8782; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.



Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlockmay be available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America whenrequested either with the mostdirect route or the most scenicroute. Additional travelinformation is also available.Allow three weeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi)Powertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.



. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must beover 250 kilometres fromwhere your trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

The Courtesy Transportationprogram is no longer available forcutaway vehicles.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.



Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes

one‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed from

vehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.



Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.

When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.



Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑32.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.



Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. Callthem at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify GeneralMotors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) or

www.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-18Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6AirbagAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42

Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Airbag System (cont.)When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-27AirbagsOn-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-19Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-31, 9-35AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Anti-theftAlarm System Messages . . . . .5-38

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-12Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27, 9-31Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12, 10-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-37Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-42

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-42Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-20CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-36

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-52

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-62, 3-65Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95

Climate Control SystemRear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . 8-3


INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3

Customer Assistance (cont.)Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-31, 9-35

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-20Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8


i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont.)If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Dual TireRotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-48Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Cooling System Messages . . .5-33Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-13Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-27Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

Enhanced TechnologyGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98FluidAutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . 10-12, 10-14


INDEX i-5

Fluid (cont.)Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-43Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-42Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Requirements, California . . . . .9-43System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-83FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-48Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-13Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glass, EnhancedTechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-26High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15


i-6 INDEX

HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

IIdle SystemFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-51Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9LightingEntry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-23Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-25Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-24


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.)Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-3

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-20Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-38Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-33Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-36Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

NNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-33

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


i-8 INDEX

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-12

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

PParkShifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-25Parking LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-23Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Power (cont.)Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33


INDEX i-9

Rear Axle (cont.)Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-4Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-43Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-24

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-24Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-3Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8


i-10 INDEX

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-81Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-62, 3-65

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Service (cont.)Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12StabiliTrakIndicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17SwitchesAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

TTaillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7


INDEX i-11

TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-59Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-58Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Secondary Latch System . . . 10-81Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Tires (cont.)Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-48Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-48Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-88Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

TrailerTow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27, 9-31Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-12, 10-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-40Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1


i-12 INDEX

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Warning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-51Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Enhanced TechnologyGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-37

2011 gmc savana owner manual mgmc savana owner manual - 2011 black plate (3,1) introduction iii the...

Documents